Canon 1066C001 Point & Shoot Digital Camera User Guide

Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Camera User Guide
●● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(= 14) section, before using the camera.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
●● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
●● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
●● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
ENGLISH
© CANON INC. 2016
CEL-SW5TA210
1
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
Before Use
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
Basic Guide
●● SD memory cards*1
Advanced Guide
●● SDHC memory cards*1*2
●● SDXC memory cards*1*2
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*1
*2
Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
verified to work with the camera.
UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Wrist Strap
Accessories
* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
Appendix
●● Printed matter is also included.
●● A memory card is not included (= 2).
Index
2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
Conventions in This Guide
Before Use
●● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
●● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
Basic Guide
●● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (= 4).
[ ] Control ring (11) on front
[ ] Up button (9) on back
[ ] Left button (14) on back
[ ] Right button (11) on back
[ ] Down button (12) on back
[ ] Control dial (6) on back
Advanced Guide
●● The user’s unauthorized photographing or recording (video and/or
sound) of people or copyrighted materials may invade the privacy of
such people and/or may violate others’ legal rights, including copyright
and other intellectual property rights, even when such photographing
or recording is intended solely for personal use.
●● For information on camera warranty or Canon Customer Support,
please refer to the warranty information provided with your camera
User Manual Kit.
●● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●● Although the screen (monitor) is produced under extremely highprecision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be
defective or may appear as red or black dots. This is not a malfunction.
This does not affect recorded images either.
●●
: Important information you should know
●●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●●
: Indicates touch-screen operations
●● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● = xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
●● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
Setting Menu
●● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3
Part Names
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Before Use
(9) (10) (11)(2) (12) (13)
(1)
(2)
(3) (4) (5)
(6)
Basic Guide
(7)
Advanced Guide
(1)
(2)
(3)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(4)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
Camera Basics
(12)
(13)
Other Shooting Modes
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
P Mode
(14) (15) (16)
(1)
Zoom lever
Shooting: [
[
Playback: [
[
(9)
(telephoto)] /
(wide angle)]
(magnify)] /
(index)]
Speaker
Screen (monitor)*2
(10) [
(10) Flash
(2)
Microphone
(11) [ (Flash)] / Right button
Playback Mode
(11) Control ring
(3)
DIGITAL terminal
(12) [ (Flash pop up)] switch
(4)
HDMITM terminal
(Information)] /
(12) [
Down button
Wi-Fi Functions
Strap mount
(13) Step/Continuous selection lever
(5)
[
(3)
Lamp
(14)
(N-Mark)*1
(6)
Control dial
(4)
Lens
(15) Tripod socket
(7)
(5)
Exposure compensation dial
(16) Memory card/battery cover
[
[
(6)
Mode dial
(8)
Movie button
(7)
Shutter button
(9)
(8)
ON/OFF button
(Drive mode)] / [
(Story
[
Highlights)] button / Up button
Used with NFC features (= 142).
Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (= 174).
(Quick Set menu/Set)] button
(13) Indicator
(2)
*1
*2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
(1)
(Wi-Fi)] button
(Ring function selector)] /
(Single-image erase)] button
Setting Menu
(Manual
(14) [ (Macro)] / [
focus)] / Left button
(15) [
(16) [
Accessories
(Playback)] button
(Menu)] button
zzTurning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Appendix
Index
4
Table of Contents
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics................................................................. 26
On/Off...................................................................................... 26
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)..............................27
Power Saving in Shooting Mode............................................27
Power Saving in Playback Mode............................................27
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information.................................. 3
Shutter Button......................................................................... 27
Conventions in This Guide........................................................ 3
Shooting Modes...................................................................... 28
Part Names............................................................................... 4
Adjusting the Screen (Monitor) Angle and Orientation...............28
Tilting the Screen Downward..................................................28
Tilting the Screen Upward......................................................28
Package Contents..................................................................... 2
Common Camera Operations................................................. 12
Safety Precautions.................................................................. 14
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 17
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure Settings..............30
Touching.....................................................................................17
Dragging.....................................................................................17
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 32
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18
Indicator Display...................................................................... 33
Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................22
Viewing.......................................................................................24
Erasing Images......................................................................25
Advanced Guide
Using the Quick Set Menu...................................................... 29
Using the Menu Screen........................................................... 30
Trying the Camera Out............................................................ 22
Basic Guide
Shooting Display Options........................................................ 29
Touch-Screen Operations....................................................... 17
Attaching the Strap.....................................................................18
Holding the Camera....................................................................18
Charging the Battery Pack..........................................................18
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card....................19
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card......................20
Setting the Date and Time..........................................................20
Changing the Date and Time..................................................21
Display Language.......................................................................22
Before Use
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Touch-Screen Operations...........................................................31
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Clock....................................................................................... 33
Setting Menu
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode....................................... 34
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings........................... 34
Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................34
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode....................................................36
Digest Movie Playback...........................................................37
Still Images/Movies................................................................37
Still Images.............................................................................37
Movies....................................................................................38
Scene Icons................................................................................38
Continuous Shooting Scenes.................................................39
Image Stabilization Icons............................................................40
On-Screen Frames.....................................................................40
Accessories
Appendix
Index
5
Common, Convenient Features.............................................. 41
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)...........................41
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom).........................41
Changing the Way the Control of the Camera Feels with the
Step/Continuous Selection Lever...........................................41
Resizing the Subject with the Control Ring................................42
Using the Self-Timer...................................................................42
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake........................43
Customizing the Self-Timer....................................................43
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter).....................44
Continuous Shooting..................................................................44
Using Face ID......................................................................... 45
Personal Information..................................................................45
Registering Face ID Information.................................................45
Shooting.....................................................................................46
Checking and Editing Registered Information............................47
Overwriting and Adding Face Information..............................48
Erasing Registered Information..............................................49
Image Customization Features............................................... 49
Changing the Aspect Ratio.........................................................49
Changing Image Quality.............................................................50
Changing Movie Image Quality..................................................50
For NTSC Video.....................................................................50
For PAL Video.........................................................................51
Helpful Shooting Features....................................................... 51
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level..........................................51
Deactivating Auto Level..............................................................52
Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................52
Deactivating Image Stabilization............................................52
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting..........................................................................53
Customizing Camera Operation.............................................. 53
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing................................53
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up.......54
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots...........................54
Other Shooting Modes..................................................... 55
Specific Scenes....................................................................... 55
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using Functions for Underwater Shots.......................................57
Shooting with an Underwater Focus Range...........................57
Correcting White Balance.......................................................57
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Applying Special Effects.......................................................... 58
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings (Self Portrait)............58
Shooting Images with the Background Blurred to Convey a
Sense of Speed (Panning).........................................................59
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range)............60
Adding Artistic Effects.............................................................60
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect).............60
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Effect).......................61
Shots Resembling Watercolors (Water Painting Effect).............61
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect)..............62
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)............................................................62
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect)............63
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus)...................63
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect...............................................64
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)......................................64
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Special Modes for Other Purposes......................................... 65
Shooting Starry Skies (Star).......................................................65
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait).............65
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape)...................................................................66
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)............................................67
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie)........................................................68
Index
6
Adjusting Colors.....................................................................70
Adjusting the Focus................................................................71
Recording Various Movies....................................................... 72
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode..................................................72
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before recording......72
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter.......................................................73
Correcting Severe Camera Shake..............................................73
Sound Settings...........................................................................73
Deactivating the Wind Filter...................................................73
Using the Attenuator...............................................................74
Recording Short Clips.................................................................74
Playback Effects.....................................................................74
Shooting Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse Movie)....................74
Recording iFrame Movies...........................................................76
P Mode.............................................................................. 77
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)........................................ 77
Image Brightness (Exposure).................................................. 78
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation).............78
Deactivating Expo. Simulation................................................78
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock).......................78
Changing the Metering Method..................................................79
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame.................79
Changing the ISO Speed............................................................80
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings...................................................80
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO Speed NR)......80
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)................................81
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings...............................................81
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)............................................................81
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority)......................82
Image Colors........................................................................... 82
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance).................................82
Custom White Balance...........................................................83
Manually Correcting White Balance.......................................83
Configuring White Balance Color Temperature......................84
Customizing Colors (Picture Style).............................................84
Customizing Picture Styles.....................................................85
Registering Customized Picture Styles..................................86
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Range and Focusing................................................ 87
Camera Basics
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)......................................................87
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode................................................87
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking).....................88
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)....................................88
Digital Tele-Converter.................................................................89
Choosing the AF Method............................................................89
1-point AF...............................................................................90
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)........................90
+Tracking.............................................................................91
Shooting with Servo AF..............................................................91
Changing the Focus Setting.......................................................92
Fine-Tuning the Focus................................................................92
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)..........................93
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)...............................93
Shooting with the AF Lock..........................................................94
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Flash....................................................................................... 95
Changing the Flash Mode..........................................................95
Auto........................................................................................95
On...........................................................................................95
Slow Synchro.........................................................................95
Off...........................................................................................95
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation.............................96
Shooting with the FE Lock..........................................................96
Changing the Flash Timing.........................................................97
Appendix
Index
Other Settings......................................................................... 97
7
Changing Image Quality.............................................................97
Capturing in RAW Format......................................................98
Using the Menu......................................................................98
Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................99
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode.................................................... 100
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode).................................... 100
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode).................................... 101
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode).... 101
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb).......................................... 102
Adjusting the Flash Output.................................................... 103
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values.................................................................................... 103
Customization for Shooting Styles........................................ 104
Changing Control Ring Settings...............................................104
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring............................105
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring..............................105
Customizing Display Information..............................................106
Customizing the Information Displayed................................106
Assigning Functions to Buttons................................................106
Customizing the Quick Set Menu.......................................... 107
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu....................................107
Rearranging Menu Items......................................................108
Saving Shooting Settings...................................................... 108
Settings That Can Be Saved................................................108
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu)......109
Playback Mode............................................................... 110
Viewing...................................................................................110
Touch-Screen Operations..................................................... 111
Switching Display Modes.......................................................... 112
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed................. 112
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)..................... 112
Histogram............................................................................. 113
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display........................... 113
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies)......................................................................... 114
Viewing by Date.................................................................... 114
Checking People Detected in Face ID...................................... 114
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Browsing and Filtering Images...............................................115
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Navigating through Images in an Index.................................... 115
Touch-Screen Operations..................................................... 115
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions........................ 115
Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images.................... 117
Touch-Screen Operations..................................................... 117
Viewing Individual Images in a Group...................................... 117
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Editing Face ID Information....................................................118
Changing Names...................................................................... 118
Erasing Names......................................................................... 119
Playback Mode
Image Viewing Options..........................................................119
Wi-Fi Functions
Magnifying Images................................................................... 119
Touch-Screen Operations.....................................................120
Viewing Slideshows..................................................................120
Setting Menu
Protecting Images................................................................. 121
Using the Menu........................................................................121
Choosing Images Individually...................................................121
Selecting a Range....................................................................122
Protecting All Images at Once..................................................122
Clearing All Protection at Once............................................123
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Erasing Images..................................................................... 123
Erasing Multiple Images at Once..............................................124
Choosing a Selection Method..............................................124
Choosing Images Individually...............................................124
Selecting a Range................................................................125
8
Specifying All Images at Once..............................................125
Sending Images to a Smartphone......................................... 142
Rotating Images.................................................................... 125
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone..............142
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode....................................................................................142
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode....144
Adding a Smartphone...............................................................144
Using Another Access Point.....................................................146
Previous Access Points............................................................147
Using the Menu........................................................................125
Deactivating Auto Rotation.......................................................126
Tagging Images as Favorites................................................ 126
Using the Menu........................................................................126
Convenient Control: Touch Actions....................................... 127
Using Touch Actions Functions.................................................127
Changing Touch Actions Functions..........................................127
Assignable Functions...........................................................128
Editing Still Images................................................................ 128
Resizing Images.......................................................................128
Using the Menu........................................................................129
Cropping...................................................................................129
Applying Filter Effects...............................................................130
Correcting Red-Eye..................................................................131
Processing RAW Images on the Camera.............................. 132
Using the Menu........................................................................133
Choosing Images Individually...............................................133
Selecting a Range................................................................133
Editing Movies....................................................................... 134
Reducing File Sizes..................................................................135
Image Quality of Compressed Movies.................................135
Editing Short Movies.................................................................135
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)........................................ 136
Choosing Themes for Albums..............................................136
Adding Background Music to Albums.......................................137
Creating Your Own Albums.......................................................138
Combining Short Clips.......................................................... 139
Wi-Fi Functions.............................................................. 141
Available Wi-Fi Features....................................................... 141
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Saving Images to a Computer............................................... 147
Preparing to Register a Computer............................................147
Installing the Software..........................................................147
Configure the computer for a Wi-Fi connection
(Windows only).....................................................................148
Saving Images to a Connected Computer................................149
Confirming Access Point Compatibility.................................149
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points................................149
Connecting to Listed Access Points.....................................151
Previous Access Points........................................................152
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service...................... 153
Registering Web Services........................................................153
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY...............................153
Registering Other Web Services..........................................155
Uploading Images to Web Services.........................................156
Setting Menu
Accessories
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer........... 157
Appendix
Sending Images to Another Camera..................................... 158
Image Sending Options......................................................... 159
Sending Multiple Images..........................................................159
Choosing Images Individually...............................................159
Selecting a Range................................................................160
Sending Favorite Images.....................................................160
Notes on Sending Images........................................................161
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size).........161
Index
9
Adding Comments....................................................................161
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync)........................ 162
Initial Preparations....................................................................162
Preparing the Camera..........................................................162
Preparing the Computer.......................................................162
Sending Images........................................................................163
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a
Smartphone..........................................................................163
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 164
Geotagging Images on the Camera.........................................164
Shooting Remotely...................................................................164
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 165
Editing Connection Information................................................165
Changing a Device Nickname..............................................166
Erasing Connection Information...........................................166
Changing the Camera Nickname.........................................166
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default....................................167
Setting Menu................................................................... 168
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions....................................... 168
Date-Based Image Storage......................................................168
File Numbering.........................................................................168
Formatting Memory Cards........................................................169
Low-Level Formatting...........................................................169
Changing the Video System.....................................................170
Electronic Level Calibration......................................................170
Resetting the Electronic Level..............................................170
Start-Up Screen........................................................................170
Using Eco Mode.......................................................................171
Power-Saving Adjustment........................................................171
Screen Brightness....................................................................171
Switching the Color of Screen Information...............................172
World Clock..............................................................................172
Date and Time..........................................................................172
Lens Retraction Timing.............................................................173
Display Language.....................................................................173
Silencing Camera Operations...................................................173
Adjusting the Volume................................................................173
Customizing Sounds.................................................................174
Hiding Hints and Tips................................................................174
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon................................................174
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel...........................................174
Metric / Non-Metric Display......................................................175
Checking Certification Logos....................................................175
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images..................175
Deleting All Copyright Information........................................175
Adjusting Other Settings...........................................................176
Restoring Default Camera Settings..........................................176
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Accessories.................................................................... 177
System Map.......................................................................... 177
Wi-Fi Functions
Optional Accessories............................................................. 178
Power Supplies.........................................................................178
Flash.........................................................................................178
Other Accessories....................................................................178
Printers.....................................................................................179
Photo and Movie Storage.........................................................179
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 179
Playback on a TV.....................................................................179
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack.............................. 180
Index
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery.............................181
Using the Software................................................................ 182
Computer Connections via a Cable..........................................182
Checking Your Computer Environment................................182
10
Installing the Software..........................................................182
Saving Images to a Computer..................................................182
Printing Images..................................................................... 184
Easy Print.................................................................................184
Configuring Print Settings.........................................................185
Cropping Images before Printing..........................................185
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing................186
Available Layout Options......................................................186
Printing ID Photos................................................................186
Printing Movie Scenes..............................................................187
Movie Printing Options.........................................................187
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)...................................187
Configuring Print Settings.....................................................188
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images.............................188
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images...........................189
Setting Up Printing for All Images.........................................189
Clearing All Images from the Print List.................................189
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)...................189
Adding Images to a Photobook................................................190
Choosing a Selection Method..............................................190
Adding Images Individually...................................................190
Adding All Images to a Photobook.......................................190
Removing All Images from a Photobook..............................190
Appendix......................................................................... 191
Functions and Menu Tables.................................................. 200
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode............................200
Quick Set Menu........................................................................203
Shooting Tab.............................................................................206
Set Up Tab................................................................................215
My Menu Tab............................................................................215
Playback Tab............................................................................216
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Handling Precautions............................................................ 217
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Specifications........................................................................ 217
Camera.....................................................................................217
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time...............219
Shooting Range....................................................................219
Number of Shots per Memory Card.....................................220
Recording Time per Memory Card.......................................220
Battery Pack NB-13L............................................................221
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE......................................221
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E...................221
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Index..................................................................................... 222
Wi-Fi Functions
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions......................................... 224
Radio Wave Interference Precautions......................................224
Security Precautions.................................................................224
Trademarks and Licensing...................................................225
Disclaimer.............................................................................225
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 191
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 195
On-Screen Information.......................................................... 197
Index
Shooting (Information Display).................................................197
Battery Level........................................................................197
Playback (Detailed Information Display)...................................198
Summary of Movie Control Panel.........................................199
11
Applying special effects
Common Camera Operations
Before Use
Basic Guide
Shoot
●● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-- = 34, = 36
●● Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)
-- = 58
Portraits
(= 55)
Matching specific scenes
Under Water
(= 57)
Fireworks
(= 56)
Starry Skies
(= 65)
Miniature Effect
(= 62)
Toy Camera Effect
(= 63)
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Background
Defocus
(= 63)
Shooting people well
Night Scenes
(= 55)
Fish-Eye Effect
(= 60)
Soft Focus
(= 64)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Monochrome
(= 64)
Other Shooting Modes
●● Focus on faces
-- = 34, = 55, = 91, = 93
P Mode
●● Without using the flash (Flash Off)
-- = 34
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-- = 42
Playback Mode
●● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-- = 36
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Shoot images with the background blurred to convey a sense of speed
-- = 59
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
12
View
●● View images (Playback Mode)
-- = 110
●● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-- = 120
●● On a TV
-- = 179
●● On a computer
-- = 182
●● Browse through images quickly
-- = 115
●● Erase images
-- = 123
Save
●● Save images to a computer
-- = 182
Use Wi-Fi functions
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Send images to a smartphone
-- = 142
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Share images online
-- = 153
Other Shooting Modes
●● Send images to a computer
-- = 162
P Mode
●● Create an album automatically
-- = 136
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Record/View Movies
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Record movies
-- = 34, = 72, = 103
Setting Menu
●● View movies (Playback Mode)
-- = 110
Accessories
Print
●● Print pictures
-- = 184
Appendix
Index
13
Safety Precautions
●● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
●● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
●● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
●● Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
This could damage your eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter
(3.3 feet) away from infants when using the flash.
●● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around
a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
●● Use only recommended power sources.
●● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
●● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
●● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
●● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
●● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
●● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
●● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
●● If your model has a viewfinder or interchangeable lens, do not look
through the viewfinder or lens at bright light sources (such as the sun
on a clear day, or a bright artificial light source).
This may damage your eyesight.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● If your model has an interchangeable lens, do not leave the lens (or the
camera with the lens attached) in the sun without the lens cap on.
This could result in a fire.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
●● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water.
Playback Mode
●● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
-- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
-- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
-- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use
if the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
-- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
-- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord,
if your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
Setting Menu
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
14
●● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
●● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
●● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
●● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
●● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
●● When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.
●● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
-- Places subject to direct sunlight
-- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
-- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns,
or other injuries.
●● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
●● When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters
(if applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on
a clear day or an intense artificial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
Other Shooting Modes
●● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location,
be careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
P Mode
●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push
the flash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with
a cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
●● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use.
Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
15
●● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating,
or explosion, resulting in product damage or fire.
●● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
16
Basic Guide
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
The camera’s touch-screen panel enables intuitive operation simply by
touching or tapping the screen.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Touching
Camera Basics
Touch the screen briefly with your
finger.
Basic Operations
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThis gesture is used to shoot, configure
camera functions, and so on.
Other Shooting Modes
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
P Mode
Dragging
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Touch the screen and move your finger
across it.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzThis gesture is used in Playback mode
to switch to the next image, or to change
the magnified image area, among other
operations.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
17
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
(1)
Attach the strap.
zzThread the end of the strap through the
strap mount (1), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
zzThe strap can also be attached to the left
side of the camera.
CB-2LH
Holding the Camera
zzPlace the strap around your wrist.
zzWhen shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers
on it.
CB-2LHE
(2)
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Charge the battery pack.
Other Shooting Modes
zzCB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
P Mode
zzCB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
Playback Mode
zzWhen charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
Wi-Fi Functions
3
(1)
Basic Guide
zzAfter aligning the
marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
(2)
Insert the battery pack.
Before Use
Setting Menu
Remove the battery pack.
zzAfter unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
Accessories
Appendix
●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the
charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
Index
18
●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (= 219).
●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
●● As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
with
uncharged one.
●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
2
(1)
(3)
(2)
(2)
Advanced Guide
3
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzInsert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
Playback Mode
zzMake sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
Open the cover.
zzSlide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
Basic Guide
zzRecording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(= 169).
(1)
Before Use
zzIf you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
(1)
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory
Card
1
Insert the battery pack.
zzHolding the battery pack with the
terminals in the position shown (1), hold
the battery lock toward (2) and insert
the battery pack toward (3) until the lock
clicks shut.
4
(2)
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Close the cover.
Accessories
zzLower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
Appendix
Index
(2)
(1)
19
●● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (= 220).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
zzOpen the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
zzThe battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
Setting the Date and Time
Before Use
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Turn the camera on.
Camera Basics
zzPress the ON/OFF button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThe [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2
Set the date and time.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
zzPush the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date and time.
zzThe memory card will pop up.
zzWhen finished, press the [
P Mode
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3
Specify your home time zone.
Setting Menu
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4
Accessories
Finish the setup process.
zzPress the [ ] button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
Appendix
Index
zzTo turn off the camera, press the ON/OFF
button.
20
●● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
●● You can also set the date and time by touching the desired item
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [ ][ ], followed
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
by [
].
touching [ ][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [
Changing the Date and Time
Before Use
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
zzPress the [
] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
2
Choose [Date/Time].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
[ 2] tab.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
3
Playback Mode
Change the date and time.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFollow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (= 20) to adjust the settings.
zzPress the [
menu screen.
Setting Menu
] button to close the
●● The camera has a built-in date/time battery (backup battery).
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks after the
battery pack is removed.
●● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack, even if power to the camera is
turned off.
●● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 20).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
21
Display Language
Trying the Camera Out
Change the display language as needed.
1
2
Still Images
Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the [
] button.
Access the setting screen.
zzPress and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [
] button.
3
Before Use
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Camera Basics
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Turn the camera on.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the ON/OFF button.
Set the display language.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzOnce the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
●● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
] button.
pressing the [ ] button before you press the [
In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
●● You can also change the display language by pressing the
] button and choosing [Language
] on the [ 3] tab.
[
●● You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
zzThe startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [
P Mode
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
].
Playback Mode
zzAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzIcons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
Setting Menu
zzFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Accessories
3
Appendix
Compose the shot.
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
Index
22
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
Recording Movies
1) Focus.
zzPress the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
Before Use
1) Start recording.
(1)
zzPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Other Shooting Modes
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
zzIf [Raise the flash] is displayed, move
the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the flash, push it down with your finger,
into the camera.
P Mode
2) Finish recording.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Playback Mode
2) Shoot.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down.
Setting Menu
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
23
3
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen
as follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the [
] button.
Choose images.
zzTo view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
Before Use
Basic Guide
zzPlayback now begins, and after the movie
] is displayed.
is finished, [
Advanced Guide
zzTo adjust the volume, press the [
buttons during playback.
zzYour last shot is displayed.
2
Play movies.
zzPress the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
][
]
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
Other Shooting Modes
●● You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, quickly drag up or down across the screen during
playback.
P Mode
zzPress and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTo access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
Setting Menu
zzTo return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
Accessories
zzMovies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
Appendix
] icon.
Index
24
Erasing Images
Before Use
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Erased images
cannot be recovered. Be sure that you want to erase the image before
using this option.
1
2
Advanced Guide
Choose an image to erase.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
Basic Guide
]
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Erase the image.
zzPress the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe current image is now erased.
zzTo cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (= 124).
Setting Menu
●● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
●● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 127).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
25
On/Off
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
Basic Guide
zzPress the ON/OFF button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
Advanced Guide
zzTo turn the camera off, press the ON/OFF
button again.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback Mode
zzPress the [
] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
zzTo turn the camera off, press the [
button again.
Other Shooting Modes
]
P Mode
●● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [
]
button.
●● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
] button.
retracted by pressing the [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(= 27).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of
inactivity.
●● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (= 171).
●● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (= 141), or when connected to a computer
(= 182).
Shutter Button
Before Use
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Basic Guide
1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
Playback Mode
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
●● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
27
Adjusting the Screen (Monitor) Angle and
Orientation
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(4)
Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specific scenes, or add a variety of
effects (= 55).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThe screen can be tilted downward
approximately 45 °.
(3 )
(2)
Advanced Guide
zzPull the top of the screen down toward
you.
(2)
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(= 22, = 34, = 36).
Basic Guide
Tilting the Screen Downward
(1)
(1)
You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how
you are shooting.
Before Use
(3)
(4)
Movie Mode
For shooting movies
(= 72, = 103).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings
(= 77, = 100).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tilting the Screen Upward
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe screen can be tilted upward
approximately 180 °.
Playback Mode
zzWhen including yourself in shots, you
can view a mirror image of yourself by
rotating the screen around toward the
front of the camera.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzWhen finished, rotate the screen until it
clicks into place to close it.
●● When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
●● Do not force the screen open too far, which may damage the
camera.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● To cancel reverse display, press the [
] button, choose
[Reverse Display] on the [ 1] tab, and then choose [Off].
28
Shooting Display Options
Using the Quick Set Menu
Before Use
Press the [ ] button to show or hide the grid lines and electronic level.
To configure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab ►
[Shooting information display] (= 106).
Configure commonly used functions in the
(Quick Set) menu.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(= 203).
Basic Guide
1
●● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
●● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(= 112).
Access the
zzPress the [
Advanced Guide
menu.
Camera Basics
] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
Choose a menu item.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
a menu item (1).
P Mode
zzAvailable options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
( 1)
( 2)
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choose an option.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
] icon can
zzItems labeled with a [
be configured by pressing the [
button.
]
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
]
Accessories
] icon can be
zzItems labeled with a [
configured by pressing the [ ] button.
Appendix
] icon can be
zzItems labeled with a [
configured by pressing the [ ] button.
Index
29
4
Confirm your choice and exit.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzThe screen before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you configured.
●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (= 176).
●● You can also exit by choosing [ ] in the menu items and
pressing the [ ] button.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure
Settings
zzTouch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
zzTouch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
zzTo return to the previous screen, touch
the [ ] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
zzYou can access the screen for items
] icon by touching
labeled with a [
[
].
zzYou can access the screen for items
] icon by touching
labeled with a [
[
].
zzYou can access the screen for items
] icon by touching
labeled with a [
[
].
Using the Menu Screen
Before Use
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen
as follows.
Basic Guide
1
Access the menu screen.
zzPress the [
2
Advanced Guide
] button.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a tab.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([ ]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identified in this
manual by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzMove the zoom lever to choose the
function tab, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose the page tab.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzYou can also drag left or right across the
screen to choose the page tab.
3
Setting Menu
Choose a menu item.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button.
zzFor menu items with options not shown,
first press the [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
Appendix
Index
zzTo return to the previous screen, press
] button.
the [
30
4
Choose an option.
zzWhen options are listed vertically, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
zzWhen options are listed horizontally,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
5
Confirm your choice and exit.
zzPress the [ ] button to confirm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
] button to return to the
zzPress the [
screen displayed before you pressed the
] button in step 1.
[
●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (= 176).
●● Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
playback mode (= 206 – = 216).
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
●● To choose tabs, press the [
] button to access the menu screen,
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
Basic Guide
●● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
Advanced Guide
●● Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
Camera Basics
●● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● To configure menu items for which options are not shown, first touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the item, and then touch to choose the
].
option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text fields)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] is shown, you can touch [
●● When [
[ ] button, if you prefer.
] instead of pressing the
Playback Mode
] is shown, you can touch [
●● When [
[
] button, if you prefer.
] instead of pressing the
Wi-Fi Functions
] is shown, the same operation is possible by touching
●● When [
[
] instead of pressing [ ].
Setting Menu
] is shown, you can touch [
●● When [
[ ] button, if you prefer.
Accessories
●● To dismiss the menu, press the [
] instead of pressing the
] button again.
Appendix
Index
31
Deleting Characters
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (= 45),
Wi-Fi connections (= 141), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
(1)
Entering Characters
zzTouch the characters to enter them.
zzThe amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
zzTouch [
] or [
], or turn the [ ] ring.
Before Use
zzTo delete the previous character, either
touch [
] or press the [ ] button.
zzTouching and holding [
characters at a time.
Basic Guide
] will delete five
Advanced Guide
Confirming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
zzPress the [
●● For some functions, [
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
] is not displayed and cannot be used.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial to select characters or icons, and
then pressing the [ ] button. You can also move the cursor by
turning the [ ] ring. To return to the previous screen, press the
] button.
[
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Entering Line Breaks
zzTouch [
Wi-Fi Functions
].
Setting Menu
Switching Input Modes
zzTo switch to numbers or symbols,
touch [ ].
Accessories
zzTouch [ ] to enter capital letters.
Appendix
zzAvailable input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Index
32
Indicator Display
Clock
The indicator on the back of the camera (= 4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
You can check the current time.
Color
Indicator
Status
Green
Blinking
Orange
On
Camera Status
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures (= 100,
= 101), connected to a computer (= 182),
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi, or display
off (= 27, = 171)
Charging via USB
●● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera. This
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Before Use
zzPress and hold the [
Basic Guide
] button.
zzThe current time appears.
Advanced Guide
zzIf you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial or turn the [ ] ring to change the
display color.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ] button again to cancel the
clock display.
P Mode
●● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the ON/OFF button to display the clock.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
33
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
Before Use
Basic Guide
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Advanced Guide
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Camera Basics
Still Images
1
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Turn the camera on.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the ON/OFF button.
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
zzThe startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [
P Mode
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
].
Playback Mode
zzAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzIcons representing the scene and
image stabilization mode are displayed
in the upper left of the screen
(= 38, = 40).
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Appendix
Index
34
3
(1)
Compose the shot.
2) Shoot.
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position
is displayed, along with the range of
focus (2).)
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down.
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
4
Recording Movies
1) Focus.
1) Start recording.
zzIf [Raise the flash] is displayed, move
the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the flash, push it down with your finger,
into the camera.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
zzSeveral frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
Basic Guide
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
(2)
zzPress the shutter button halfway.
The camera beeps twice after focusing,
and frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
Before Use
(1)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Setting Menu
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
35
2)Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
zzTo resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
zzWhen you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
3) Finish recording.
zzPress the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
zzRecording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images.
The camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot,
which are later combined in a digest movie.
Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums
(= 136).
1
Enter [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
] mode.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFollow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(= 34) and choose [ ].
2
Other Shooting Modes
Compose the shot.
P Mode
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (= 34) to compose the shot and
focus.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzFor more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Shoot.
zzFollow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(= 34) to shoot a still image.
Setting Menu
zzThe camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
36
●● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
●● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
] mode,
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
or operating the camera in other ways.
●● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
●● Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [
] for
] for PAL and cannot be changed (= 170).
NTSC or [
●● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (= 174).
●● Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following
] mode.
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
-- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and
40 seconds.
-- The digest movie is protected (= 121).
-- Daylight saving time (= 20) or time zone (= 172) settings
are changed.
-- A new folder is created (= 168).
●● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
●● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (= 30) ► [ 7] tab ►
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
●● Individual chapters can be edited (= 135).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (= 114).
Still Images/Movies
●● If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
turned on while holding down [ ]. To activate sounds, press
] button, choose [Mute] on the [ 3] tab, and then
the [
choose [Off].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Still Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
●● If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the
subject. For details on the flash range, see “Camera” (= 217).
●● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (= 219).
●● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
●● A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait,
or release it and press it again.
●● No shutter sound is played when “Sleeping” and “Sleeping
Babies” icons (= 38) are displayed.
●● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
●● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(= 54).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
37
Scene Icons
Movies
Before Use
Still Images
●● Before movie recording, lower the flash with your finger. During
recording, keep your fingers away from the microphone (1).
Leaving the flash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
muffled.
Subject
(1)
People
Moving People
Shadows on Face
●● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
●● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant
camera shake. To record subjects at the same size shown before
recording, follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at
the Same Size Shown before Shooting” (= 53).
●● Audio is recorded in stereo.
Movies
In [ ] and [
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (= 39).
*3
*3
–
–
–
Sleeping
*
2
*3
–
–
–
Babies
*3
*3
–
–
–
Smiling Babies
*
3
*3
–
–
–
Sleeping Babies
*2
*3
–
–
–
Moving Children
*
3
*3
–
–
–
Other Subjects
*2
*3
Other Moving Subjects
*3
*3
–
–
–
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*2
*3
–
–
*3
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Background
Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights
–
*3
*2
3
3
–
–
–
*
*
2
–
–
–
–
*
Smiling
*1
*2
Basic Guide
Tripod used.
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
●● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
] is dark blue,
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
●● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
38
●● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
●● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [ ] (= 39, = 44).
●● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the flash is set to [ ].
●● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (= 45). Confirm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (= 20).
●● The scene icon may not match actual shooting conditions, or it
may not be possible to shoot with your expected effect, color, or
brightness. In these cases, it is recommended that you shoot in
[ ] mode (= 77).
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is
displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously.
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is
displayed when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons
[ ], [ ], or [ ] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots
continuously.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Children
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the flash will not fire.
Also, the shutter sound will not be played.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
●● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first
shot.
Accessories
Appendix
●● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
and then select [
[ ] dial).
Index
39
Image Stabilization Icons
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in
macro shots (Hybrid IS). For movies, [
] is displayed and [ ]
image stabilization is also applied.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake,
as when recording while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to
counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
●● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Depending on the shooting conditions and subject, no frames
may be displayed, frames may not be displayed around desired
subjects, or frames may be displayed on the background or
similar areas. In these cases, it is recommended that you shoot in
[ ] mode (= 77).
●● To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode
(= 93). Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 52).
In this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
] mode, no [
] icon is displayed.
●● In [
Accessories
Appendix
Index
40
Common, Convenient Features
●● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (= 30) ► [
► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 17x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [
].
zzHold the lever until zooming stops.
zzZooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
(1)
2
Move the zoom lever toward [
again.
]
zzThe camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
zz(1) is the current zoom factor.
3] tab
Basic Guide
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Movies
Camera Basics
Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 24 – 100 mm (35mm film
equivalent).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo change the focal length from 24 to
28 mm, turn the [ ] ring counterclockwise
until it clicks. Turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise to zoom in or clockwise
to zoom out.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Step zoom is not available when recording movies even if you
turn the [ ] ring.
Playback Mode
●● When you are using digital zoom (= 41), you cannot adjust the
zoom factor by turning the [ ] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 100 mm by turning it clockwise.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
-- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
-- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
-- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
●● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (= 97), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
Changing the Way the Control of the Camera Feels with
the Step/Continuous Selection Lever
Accessories
You can change how the control of the camera feels when you turn the
control ring.
zzWhen you lower the selection lever, the
clicking of the control ring will stop and
you will be able to turn it smoothly.
Appendix
Index
41
Resizing the Subject with the Control Ring
Still Images
Using the Self-Timer
Movies
By assigning seamless zoom to the control ring, you can further fine-tune
the size of the subject or zoom in or out faster than would be possible with
the zoom lever.
1
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzPress the [ ] or [ ][ ] buttons, or turn
the [ ] ring or the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
zzPress the [
setting.
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29).
zzOnce the setting is complete, [
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] is
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
] button to complete the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
2
Compose the shot.
zzTo adjust to telephoto, turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise, and to adjust to wide
angle, turn it clockwise.
Shoot.
Playback Mode
zzFor Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFor Movies: Press the movie button.
Setting Menu
zzOnce you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a selftimer sound.
Accessories
zzTwo seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
zzTo cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
zzTo restore the original setting, choose [
in step 1.
Appendix
Index
]
42
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
zzFollow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42) and choose [ ].
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specified delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
●● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required
between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
●● When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
P Mode
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose [ ].
Playback Mode
zzFollowing step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Wi-Fi Functions
Configure the setting.
Setting Menu
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button twice.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [
displayed.
] is
Appendix
Index
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42) to shoot.
43
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)
Still Images
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your finger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1
Before Use
Enable the Touch Shutter function.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Enable] (= 30).
Movies
In [
] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Camera” (= 217).
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [
] or [ ]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [
is displayed.
] or [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
2
Shoot.
zzTouch the subject on the screen, and
then lift your finger immediately.
zzThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
zzTo cancel Touch Shutter, choose [Disable]
in step 1.
●● Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [ ].
Shoot.
Playback Mode
zzHold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
●● During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
●● Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 42).
●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
●● Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
●● With Touch Shutter (= 44), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during
continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined
for the first shot.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
44
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered
person among a large number of images (= 115).
It is recommended to register information in advance so that images can
be selected easily for Story Highlights (= 136) albums.
Personal Information
●● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
●● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (= 49).
Registering Face ID Information
Before Use
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to
12 people to use with Face ID.
1
Basic Guide
Access the setting screen.
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 30).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2
Setting Menu
Register face information.
Accessories
zzAim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
zzA white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
Appendix
Index
zzIf the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
45
5
zzAfter [Register?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
zzTo register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
zzThe [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
3
zzRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
zzPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(= 32).
zzTo register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date.
zzWhen finished, press the [
4
]
] button.
Save the settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzAfter a message is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
Continue registering face
information.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● The flash will not fire when following step 2.
●● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
] mode.
(= 38) will not be displayed in [
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not filled all 5 face info slots (= 45).
Playback Mode
Shooting
Wi-Fi Functions
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
Setting Menu
zzWhen you point the camera toward
people, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
zzShoot.
zzDisplayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
46
●● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
●● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
●● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
●● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (= 118).
●● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (= 45).
●● Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
[Shooting Info] check box in “Customizing the Information
Displayed” (= 106) so that the names are not displayed.
●● If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose
[Off].
●● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (= 112).
●● Names recorded in continuous shooting (= 44) continue to be
recorded in the same position as the first shot, even if subjects
move.
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45), choose [Check/
Edit Info].
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person whose information you want
to check or edit, and then press the
[ ] button.
3
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Check or edit the information as
needed.
Playback Mode
zzTo check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Profile] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (= 45).
zzTo check face information, choose
[Face Info List] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button. Press the [ ]
button on the screen displayed, choose
face information to erase by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button.
[Erase?] is displayed. To erase face
information, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
47
●● Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children,
as their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not
been filled.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45), choose [Add Face
Info].
2
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Register face information.
Camera Basics
zzFollow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
●● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase
unwanted existing info (= 49), and then register new face
information (= 45) as needed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzIf five items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
zzIf less than five items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
48
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
●● You can also erase names in image information (= 119).
Movies
Advanced Guide
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 29).
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person to erase, and
then press the [ ] button.
●● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (= 114), overwrite their info (= 118),
or search for images that include them (= 115).
Basic Guide
Still Images
Choose a person to erase their
information.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Before Use
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
zzFollow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45) and choose
[Erase Info].
2
Image Customization Features
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzOnce the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm film. Used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard
sizes.
Used for display on standard-definition televisions or similar
display devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or
A-series sizes.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Square aspect ratio.
●● Not available in [
] mode.
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU (= 30)
► [ 1] tab ► [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
Appendix
Index
49
Changing Image Quality
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image quality. For guidelines on how many of
each kind of image can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per
Memory Card” (= 220).
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 29).
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
automatically based on the NTSC or PAL setting (= 170). For guidelines
on the total recording time for movies at each level of image quality
that will fit on a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card”
(= 220).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, choose the movie
quality menu item, and then choose the
desired option (= 29).
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
P Mode
When deciding the number of pixels based on print size, use the following
table as a guide for images with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
Playback Mode
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
●● Not available in [
] mode.
●● You can also change the image quality by accessing MENU
(= 30) ► [ 1] tab ► [Image quality].
Wi-Fi Functions
For NTSC Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Frame Rate
Setting Menu
Details
1920 x 1080
59.94 fps
1920 x 1080
29.97 fps
1920 x 1080
23.98 fps
1280 x 720
29.97 fps
For shooting in HD.
640 x 480
29.97 fps
For shooting in
standard definition.
Accessories
For shooting in
]
Full HD. [
enables movies with
smoother motion.
Appendix
Index
50
For PAL Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Helpful Shooting Features
Frame Rate
Details
1920 x 1080
50.00 fps
1920 x 1080
25.00 fps
1280 x 720
25.00 fps
For shooting in HD.
640 x 480
25.00 fps
For shooting in
standard definition.
For shooting in
Full HD.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display the electronic level.
zzPress the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
●● There are black bars displayed on the left and right in [
]
] modes and on the top and bottom in [
],
and [
], [
], [
], [
], [
], and
[
] modes. They indicate that this image area cannot be
[
recorded.
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU
(= 30) ► [ 7] tab ► [Movie rec. size].
2
(1)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Straighten the camera.
zz(1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzIf the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
(2)
●● If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
[
information display].
●● The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
●● If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
●● Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
level the camera (= 170).
] mode.
●● Not available in [
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
51
Deactivating Auto Level
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Normally, auto leveling keeps movies straight during recording. To cancel
this feature, choose [Disable].
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 30).
zzChoose [Disable], and press the [
button again (= 30).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
1
]
Camera Basics
Access the setting screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[IS Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 30).
●● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged (= 53).
2
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
desired option (= 30).
Continuous
Off
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions
is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (= 40).
Deactivates image stabilization.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
52
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
of significant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto Level.
zzSet [ Auto level] to [Disable] as
described in “Deactivating Auto Level”
(= 52).
Customizing Camera Operation
Before Use
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(= 30).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
zzFollow step 1 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (= 52) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[AF‑assist Beam] on the [ 4] tab,
and then choose [Off].
zzChoose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (= 30).
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
●● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(= 52).
]
●● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
] (PAL).
(NTSC) or [
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
53
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images
Movies
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.
1
2
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Image review] on the [ 1] tab, and then
choose the desired option.
Access the [Flash Settings] screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Configure the setting.
zzChoose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off].
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed after shots.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [2 sec.].
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Hold
Off
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Displays images for the specified time. Even while the
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
No image display after shots.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
54
Specific Scenes
Before Use
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
Basic Guide
1
Enter [
zzSet the mode dial to [
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
2
Advanced Guide
] mode.
].
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a shooting mode.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(= 29).
P Mode
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shoot.
Playback Mode
●● Turn the mode dial to [
]. You can also choose the shooting
mode by touching [ ] in the upper left.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
55
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
zzTake shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Still Images
Movies
zzBeautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
zzA single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
●● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
●● In [ ] and [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO
speed (= 80) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
●● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
●● In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (= 52).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [
]
mode instead of [ ] mode will give better results (= 34).
●● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(= 30) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
●● In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Shooting Underwater (Underwater)
Still Images
Movies
Wi-Fi Functions
zzNatural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
optional waterproof case (= 178).
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzThis mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating filter
(= 57).
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Appendix
Index
Movies
zzVivid shots of fireworks.
56
Using Functions for Underwater Shots
Shooting with an Underwater Focus Range
Still Images
Movies
If focusing is difficult in [ ] mode (= 55) with a focus range of [ ],
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
1
Configure the setting.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
zzPress the [ ] button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Focus range
Underwater
Macro
Quick
Manual
Focus
Shoot.
Description
Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom
for even closer shots.
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting
opportunities when shooting subjects some
distance away. Especially effective for moving
subjects.
Focus on subjects manually (= 87).
Refer to “Shooting Range” (= 219) for details on the range of each
focus range.
●● In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
●● In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
grainy at some recording pixel settings (= 97).
] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus.
●● In [
In this case, try setting the focus range to [ ].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired focus range, and then touching it again.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Other Shooting Modes
Movies
White balance can be manually corrected in [ ] mode (= 55). This
adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available colorcompensating filter.
1
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
2
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Choose white balance.
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu.
3
Setting Menu
Adjust the setting.
Accessories
zzTurn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A, and then press the [ ]
button.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Appendix
Index
57
●● B represents blue, and A represents amber.
●● White balance can also be manually corrected by recording
custom white balance data (= 83) before following the
preceding steps.
Applying Special Effects
Before Use
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Basic Guide
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings
(Self Portrait)
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself
stand out.
1
Choose [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
].
Other Shooting Modes
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
2
P Mode
Open the screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzOpen the screen as shown.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3
Configure the setting.
Setting Menu
zzOn the screen, touch the icon of the
setting to configure.
Accessories
Appendix
zzChoose the desired option.
zzTo return to the previous screen,
touch [ ].
4
Index
Shoot.
58
Item
Details
Choose from [
defocusing.
] or one of six levels of background
Choose from five levels of brightness.
Choose from five levels of skin smoothing. Skin smoothing
is optimized for the main subject’s face.
To use Touch Shutter, choose [ ].
●● Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on
the shooting conditions.
●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
●● In [ ] flash mode, background defocusing is set to [
] and
cannot be changed.
●● In [ ] mode, the time left before shooting is shown on the top
of the screen when you activate the self-timer by selecting [ ],
or by selecting [ ] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.
Shooting Images with the Background Blurred
to Convey a Sense of Speed (Panning)
Still Images
Movies
By panning, you can shoot blurred backgrounds that convey a sense of
speed.
The camera will detect blurring of the subject and correct it, so you can
reduce blurring of the subject.
1
Choose [
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
2
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot.
P Mode
zzBefore shooting, with the shutter button
pressed halfway, move the camera so
that it follows the subject.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzWith the moving subject in the center of
the screen, press the shutter button all
the way down.
Playback Mode
zzMove the camera so that it continues to
follow the subject even after you have
pressed the shutter button all the way
down.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Appendix
●● To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] ring.
●● When shooting, keep your arms close to your body and hold the
camera with both hands steadily, and turn your whole body to
follow subjects.
●● The effect is more apparent when you follow subjects moving
horizontally such as trains or cars.
Index
59
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Adding Artistic Effects
Still Images
1
Choose [
].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
zzThe subject appears slightly enlarged.
2
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washedout highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in highcontrast shots.
Shoot.
zzHold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
Before Use
zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect.
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Natural
Art Standard
Art Vivid
Art Bold
Art Embossed
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Images are natural and organic.
Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images
Playback Mode
Movies
Wi-Fi Functions
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
●● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
●● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (= 52).
●● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
●● [ ] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway
in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal
image brightness.
1
Choose [
].
Setting Menu
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shoot.
60
Shots Resembling Watercolors
(Water Painting Effect)
●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Still Images
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings
(Art Bold Effect)
Movies
Make subjects look more substantial, like subjects in oil paintings.
Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
2
Movies
Soften colors, for photos resembling watercolor paintings.
Still Images
1
Before Use
Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
1
Choose [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
].
Camera Basics
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
Other Shooting Modes
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
P Mode
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shoot.
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Playback Mode
Shoot.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
61
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [
].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
zzA white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzMove the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose the speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
Speed
Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Camera Basics
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● The zoom is not available when recording movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [ ][ ] buttons.
●● To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[ ][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
●● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
] and [ ] at
●● Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [
] (= 49). These quality settings cannot
an aspect ratio of [
be changed.
●● You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
62
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus)
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [
].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [
].
2
Choose a color tone.
zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard
Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects
and subject- and scene-based image processing.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
2
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot.
P Mode
zzHold the camera steady as you shoot.
Two consecutive images are captured
when you press the shutter button all the
way down.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzA blinking [ ] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Setting Menu
●● For the best results with background defocusing, try shooting
close to the subject, and ensure ample distance between the
subject and background.
●● There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again.
●● To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] ring.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
63
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Take monochrome pictures with a gritty, rough feeling.
1
Choose [
].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ].
2
Camera Basics
Choose an effect level.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
Other Shooting Modes
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
P Mode
Shoot.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
64
4
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
zzThe second and third shots are now
taken, without firing the flash.
5
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies. After initially firing
the flash to capture the person, the camera shoots twice without flash.
The three images are combined into a single image and processed to
make the stars more prominent.
For details on the flash range, see “Camera” (= 217).
1
Shoot.
zzPress the shutter button. The flash fires
as the camera takes the first shot.
Choose [ ].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Have the person stay still until the
lamp blinks.
Camera Basics
zzThe person you are shooting should stay
still until the lamp blinks three times after
the third shot, which may take up to about
two seconds.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzAll the shots are combined to create a
single image.
P Mode
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Raise the flash.
zzMove the [ ] switch to raise the flash.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as
expected.
●● For better shots, have the person stand away from illumination
such as street lights, and make sure the flash is raised.
●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
●● To avoid blurry shots, make sure the person you shoot in steps
4 – 5 stays still.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Secure the camera.
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Index
65
●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (= 172) before shooting.
●● To adjust subject brightness, try changing the flash exposure
compensation (= 96).
●● To adjust background brightness, try changing the exposure
compensation (= 78). However, images may not look as
expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should
stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 15 seconds.
●● To capture more stars and brighter starlight, choose MENU
(= 30) ► [ 7] tab ► [Star Portrait Settings] ► [Star Visibility]
► [Prominent]. However, images may not look as expected under
some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in
steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 8 seconds.
●● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ 7] tab ►
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
Still Images
Movies
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
1
Choose [ ].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
P Mode
Secure the camera.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Shoot.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Index
66
●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (= 172) before shooting.
●● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ 5] tab ►
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
●● Try switching to manual focus mode (= 71, = 87) to more
accurately specify the focal position before shooting.
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Still Images
Movies
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Secure the camera.
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and
then shooting begins.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note
that cancellation may take up to about
30 seconds.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (= 172) before shooting.
●● Try switching to manual focus mode (= 71, = 87) to more
accurately specify the focal position before shooting.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
zzTurn the [ ] ring to choose the shooting
duration.
Appendix
Index
67
Shooting Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images
Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specified
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots.
Check the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1
Choose [
].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Configure movie settings.
zzPress the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
the desired option.
3
4
Check the brightness.
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
zzSwitch to Playback mode (= 110) and
check image brightness.
zzTo adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level on the shooting screen.
Check brightness again by taking another
shot.
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the movie button. Recording
begins, and the indicator on the back of
the camera blinks.
P Mode
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 30 seconds.
Playback Mode
zzThe camera operates in Eco mode
(= 171) while shooting.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Secure the camera.
Accessories
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Appendix
Index
68
Item
Save
Stills
Options
Enable/Disable
Effect
Shot Interval
Frame Rate
Shooting Time
Auto exposure
15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
,
,
(NTSC)
(PAL)
60 min., 90 min.,
120 min., Unlimited
Lock to 1st shot/
For each shot
Details
You can choose to save
each shot collected before
the movie is created. When
[Enable] is selected, you
cannot use [Effect].
Choose movie effects,
such as star trails.
Choose the interval
between each shot.
Choose the movie frame
rate.
Choose the length of
the recording session.
To record until the
battery runs out, choose
[Unlimited].
You can choose to lock to
the first shot’s exposure or
change the exposure for
each shot.
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a
one-hour session)
Before Use
Frame Rate
NTSC
PAL
Basic Guide
Interval between Shots
Playback Time
15 sec.
16 sec.
15 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
4 sec.
1 min.
4 sec.
1 min.
2 sec.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
●● If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
●● A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
69
●● Sound is not recorded.
●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (= 172) before shooting.
●● You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU
(= 30) ► [ 5] tab ► [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].
Stills] set to [Enable] are managed
●● Images saved with [Save
as a single group, and during playback, only the first image is
]
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
is displayed in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped
image (= 123), all images in the group are also erased. Be
careful when erasing images.
●● Grouped images can be played back individually (= 117) and
ungrouped (= 117).
●● Protecting (= 121) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
●● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played
back using Image Search (= 115). In this case, images are
temporarily ungrouped.
●● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (= 118), magnifying (= 119),
tagging as favorites (= 126), editing (= 128), printing
(= 184), setting up individual image printing (= 188), or
adding to a photobook (= 190). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (= 117) or cancel grouping
(= 117) first.
●● Try switching to manual focus mode (= 71, = 87) to more
accurately specify the focal position before shooting.
Adjusting Colors
Before Use
Still Images
Colors can be manually adjusted in [
1
Movies
] mode.
Choose a shooting mode.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzChoose [ ] (= 65), [ ] (= 66),
[ ] (= 67), or [ ] (= 68).
2
Camera Basics
Choose color adjustment.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 29).
3
Other Shooting Modes
Adjust the setting.
P Mode
zzTurn the [ ] ring or press the [ ][ ]
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [
displayed.
●● B represents blue, and A represents amber.
●● Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in [
●● Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (= 83).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] is
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
] mode.
]
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
Appendix
Index
70
Adjusting the Focus
Still Images
Movies
Automatically adjust the focus to suit starry skies.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
zzChoose [ ] (= 66), [
or [ ] (= 68).
2
●● The focus may not be adjusted under the following conditions.
In this case, try again from step 3.
-- There is a bright light source
-- Airplanes or other light sources or clouds crossed the sky
] (= 67),
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● If adjustment fails, focus returns to the original position.
Camera Basics
Secure the camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
3
Other Shooting Modes
Frame the stars to capture.
P Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] button.
Playback Mode
zzTilt the camera so that the stars to
capture are inside the frame displayed.
Wi-Fi Functions
4
Setting Menu
Adjust the focus.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ] button. [Adjusting star
focus] is displayed, and adjustment
begins.
zzAdjustment may take about 20 seconds.
Do not move the camera until
[Adjustment completed] is displayed.
zzPress the [
5
Appendix
Index
] button.
Shoot (= 66, = 67, = 68).
71
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before recording
Recording Various Movies
Still Images
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode
Still Images
1
Enter [
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
Movies
Lock the exposure.
zzTouch [
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
1
].
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Configure the settings to suit the
movie (= 200).
3
Shoot.
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
] to lock the exposure.
zzTo unlock the exposure, touch [
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29).
Before Use
Camera Basics
] again.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Adjust the exposure.
zzTurn the exposure compensation dial.
3
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot (= 72).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the movie button.
zzTo stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(= 30) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
Appendix
●● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons while [ ] is displayed.
] and
Index
72
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ 8]
tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]
(= 30).
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and
subjects are further enlarged.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzFollow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting” (= 53) to choose
[High].
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [A-SLOW ON].
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
●● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
] (PAL).
(NTSC) or [
P Mode
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Sound Settings
●● Auto slow shutter is only available for [
movies.
] and [
Playback Mode
]
Still Images
Movies
Wi-Fi Functions
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Setting Menu
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind.
In this case, you can deactivate the wind filter.
Accessories
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Wind Filter] on the [ 8] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 30).
zzChoose [Off] (= 30).
Appendix
Index
73
Using the Attenuator
Playback Effects
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.
However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ 8] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 30).
zzChoose an option as desired (= 30).
Recording Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (= 136).
1
Enter [
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
].
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29).
zzBlack bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen. They indicate
that this image area cannot be recorded.
2
Specify the shooting time and
playback effect.
zzPress the [ ] button.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and press the [ ][ ] buttons
to set the playback effect (= 74).
3
Before Use
2x
Playback in fast motion
1x
Playback at normal speed
1/2x
Basic Guide
Playback in slow motion
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and
played again in slow motion
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Sound is not recorded in these clips.
] (for NTSC) or [
] (for PAL)
●● The movie quality is [
(= 50, = 51) and cannot be changed.
] recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
●● During [
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specified
interval, you can create a movie. You can view subject changes, such as
landscape changes, in fast-forward. You can adjust the shooting interval
and number of shots as needed.
1
Choose [
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
].
zzSet the mode dial to [
Setting Menu
].
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29).
Accessories
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top
and bottom edges of the screen.
They indicate that this image area cannot
be recorded.
Appendix
Index
Shoot (= 72).
zzA bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
74
2
Configure movie settings.
zzPress the [ ] button.
zzChoose an item (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), choose the
desired option, and then press the
[
] button.
3
Secure the camera.
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
zzTo start shooting, press the movie button.
Item
Shooting scene
Interval/ Shots
Auto exposure
Review image
Item
Time required
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
zzTo cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
zzThe camera operates in Eco mode
(= 171) while shooting.
Playback time
Details
Choose from three types of scenes.
Choose the number of shots per specified seconds.
You can choose to lock to the first shot’s exposure
or change the exposure for each shot.
Play the movie immediately after it is shot for
a maximum of 2 seconds.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Details
Time required for shooting. The time varies
depending on interval/shots.
-- Scene 1: Maximum of 1 hour
-- Scene 2 and 3: Maximum of 2 hours
Playback time of the movie created from still
images.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● If you shoot fast-moving subjects, they may look distorted.
Playback Mode
●● Sound is not recorded.
●● Focal position during shooting remains constant, after it is
determined for the first shot.
●● The movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.
●● The frame rate of time-lapse movies varies depending on
the video system (= 170) setting and cannot be changed:
] for NTSC and [
] for PAL.
[
●● You can also configure the settings by choosing MENU
(= 30) ► [ 7] tab ► [Time-lapse movie settings].
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
75
Recording iFrame Movies
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software
or devices.
1
Choose [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
].
zzSet the mode dial to [
Camera Basics
].
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzBlack bars displayed on the top
and bottom edges of the screen.
They indicate that this image area cannot
be recorded.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shoot (= 72).
●● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
] (for NTSC) or [
●● The movie quality is [
(= 50, = 51) and cannot be changed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
] (for PAL)
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
76
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Enter [ ] mode.
Camera Basics
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [ ] mode.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customize the settings as desired
(= 78 – = 99), and then shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
●● If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(= 80) or activating the flash (if subjects are dark, = 95),
which may enable optimum exposure.
●● Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the
menu (= 29) and MENU
movie button. However, some
(= 30) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
●● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode
(= 200).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
77
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Still Images
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure
Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.
zzAs you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
1
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Lock the exposure.
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
Camera Basics
zz[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
Other Shooting Modes
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo unlock the exposure, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [ ]
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Deactivating Expo. Simulation
Images are displayed on the screen at a brightness similar to the image
that will be shot. Therefore, the screen brightness changes accordingly
even when exposure compensation is in use. By not using this function,
you can display images with brightness suitable for shooting regardless of
changes in exposure compensation.
zzPress the [
] button, and
then choose the [ 1] tab ► [Expo.
simulation] ► [Disable] (= 30).
2
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Compose the shot and shoot.
Playback Mode
●● AE: Auto Exposure
●● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] dial
(Program Shift).
Wi-Fi Functions
●● You can also lock or unlock the exposure by touching [
step 1.
Accessories
Setting Menu
] in
Appendix
Index
78
Changing the Metering Method
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Still Images
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 29).
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
metering
Spot
metering
Centerweighted
average
Still Images
Movies
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE
Point frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point
frame to the AF frame (= 79).
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
1
Set the metering method to [
Before Use
Movies
].
zzFollow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (= 79) to choose
[ ].
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Configure the setting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (= 30).
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(= 90).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Not available when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] (= 91).
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
79
Changing the ISO Speed
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images
Movies
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 29).
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
●● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
●● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
●● The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces
subject and camera shake and increases the flash range.
However, shots may look grainy.
●● You can also set the ISO speed by accessing MENU (= 30) ►
[ 5] tab ► [ISO speed] ► [ISO Speed].
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of
three levels.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the setting screen.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [
] button, choose [ISO
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 30).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
P Mode
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (= 30).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO
Speed NR)
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Low], [Standard], [High].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
Accessories
zzPress the [
] button, choose [High
ISO speed NR] on the [ 6] tab, and
then choose the desired option (= 30).
Appendix
Index
80
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3stop increments.
1
Choose [ ].
For optimal brightness in the scenes you shoot, Auto ND filter reduces
light intensity to 1/8 the actual level, by an amount equivalent to three
stops. Choosing [ ] enables you to reduce the shutter speed and
aperture value.
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 29).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
●● If you chose [ ], mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent the camera from shaking.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (= 52).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● ND: Neutral Density
Wi-Fi Functions
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)
●● AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (= 95).
●● Continuous shooting (= 44) is not available in this mode.
Still Images
●● If exposure compensation is already in use (= 78), the value
specified for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
●● You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
] button when the exposure compensation screen
the [
(= 78) is displayed.
●● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
(= 43).
Basic Guide
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [ ] (= 30).
2
Before Use
Setting Menu
Movies
Accessories
Correct brightness and contrast automatically to avoid images that are too
dark or lack contrast.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 29).
Appendix
Index
]
81
●● This feature may increase noise under some shooting conditions.
●● When the effect of the Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and
images become too bright, set it to [Low] or [Disable].
●● Images may still be bright or the effect of exposure compensation
may be weak under a setting other than [Disable] if you use a
darker setting for exposure compensation or flash exposure
compensation. For shots at your specified brightness, set this
feature to [Disable].
Image Colors
Basic Guide
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 29).
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU (= 30)
► [ 5] tab ► [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone
Priority)
Still Images
Before Use
P Mode
Movies
Improve gradation in bright image areas to avoid loss of detail in subject
highlights.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Highlight tone priority] on the [ 5] tab,
and then choose [D+] (= 30).
●● With [D+], ISO speeds of 250 or lower are not available. The Auto
Lighting Optimizer is also disabled, in this case.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance
for the shooting conditions.
Daylight
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade
For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy
For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten light
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
White fluorescent
light
For shooting under white fluorescent lighting.
Flash
For shooting with the flash.
Underwater
For shooting underwater (= 57).
For manually setting a custom white balance
(= 83).
For manually setting white balance color
temperature (= 84).
Custom
Color temp.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
82
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
1
Shoot a white object.
zzAim the camera at a sheet of paper or
other plain white subject, so that white
fills the screen.
zzFocus manually and shoot (= 87).
2
Choose [Custom WB].
zzChoose [Custom WB] on the [ 6] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzThe custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
3
zzOn the confirmation screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], press
the [ ] button, and then press the [ ]
button again.
] button to close the
zzPress the [
menu.
Choose [
].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18 % gray reflector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white
balance.
●● The current white balance and related settings are disregarded
when you shoot in step 1.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Manually Correcting White Balance
Load the white data.
zzSelect your image from step 1, and then
press the [ ] button.
4
●● Shots in step 1 that are too bright or dark may prevent you from
setting the white balance correctly.
●● A message is displayed if you specify an image in step 3 that is
not suitable for loading white data. Choose [Cancel] to choose a
different image. Choose [OK] to use that image for loading white
data, but note that it may not produce a suitable white balance.
●● If [Unselectable image.] is displayed in step 3, choose [OK] to
clear the message and specify another image.
”] is displayed in step 3, press the [ ] button to
●● If [Set WB to “
].
return to the menu screen, and then choose [
Still Images
Playback Mode
Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or colorcompensating filter.
1
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
Accessories
zzFollow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (= 82) to
choose [ ].
zzTurn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A.
Appendix
Index
zzFollow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (= 82) to
choose [ ].
83
2
Configure advanced settings.
zzTo configure more advanced settings,
press the [
] button and adjust the
correction level by turning the [ ] ring
or [ ] dial or pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons.
zzTo reset the correction level, press the
[ ] button.
zzPress the [
setting.
] button to complete the
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●● Any correction level you set is retained even if you change the
white balance option in step 1.
●● B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
●● You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
adjustment screen is accessed simply by turning the [ ] ring or
the [ ] dial (= 104).
●● One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about
5 mireds on a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion filter
density)
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU (= 30)
► [ 6] tab ► [WB Correction].
●● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
Configuring White Balance Color Temperature
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
You can specify a value to configure the white balance color temperature.
zzFollow the procedure in “Capturing
Natural Colors (White Balance)”
(= 82) to choose [ ].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● You can also configure the white balance color temperature by
choosing MENU (= 30) ► [ 6] tab ► [White Balance] ► [ ].
●● Color temperature can be set in a range of approximately 2,500 to
10,000 K (in 100 K increments).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customizing Colors (Picture Style)
Still Images
Playback Mode
Movies
You can choose your preferred colors as a Picture Style to suit the picture
representation and subjects. Eight Picture Styles are available, and each
can be further customized.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 29).
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
84
Auto
Standard
Portrait
Landscape
Fine Detail
Neutral
Faithful
Automatically adjusts colors to suit the shooting
conditions. Makes pictures of blue skies,
greenery, and sunset colors more vivid in
scenes of nature, outdoor, and sunsets.
Makes pictures more vivid and sharper.
Generally, this setting can be used for most
scenes.
Makes pictures slightly sharper, with clear
skin tone. Ideal for close-ups of people. You
can adjust skin tone by changing [Color tone]
(= 85).
Makes pictures much sharper with more vivid
blue skies and greenery. Ideal for impressive
landscape shots.
Used for rendering sharper edges and intricate
textures. Makes pictures slightly more vivid.
Used for images to be processed on a
computer. Makes pictures natural-colored with a
subdued appearance.
Used for images assumed to be processed
on a computer. Faithfully reproduces the
actual colors of subjects as measured under
daylight with a color temperature of 5200 K.
Makes pictures have a toned-down color with a
subdued appearance.
Monochrome
Creates black and white pictures.
User Def.
You can register basic styles, such as [Portrait],
[Landscape], and Picture Style files, and
customize them (= 84).
Customizing Picture Styles
Before Use
You can customize the following settings.
Strength
Fineness
Sharpness
Threshold
Contrast
Saturation*1
Color tone*1
Adjusts edge enhancement level. For
softer (more blurry) images, set a lower
value, and for harder (sharper) images,
set a higher value.
Indicates the edge thinness that
sharpness enhancement applies to.
For more enhanced details, set a lower
value.
Specifies how much difference
in contrast between edges and
surrounding areas there should be to
enhance edges. To enhance edges
with smaller contrast difference, set a
lower value. Note that if you set a lower
value, noise may be emphasized.
Adjusts contrast. For lower contrast, set
a lower value, and for higher contrast,
set a higher value.
Adjusts color saturation. For less
intense colors, set a lower value, and
for more intense colors, set a higher
value.
Adjusts skin tone. For more red tone,
set a lower value, and for more yellow
tone, set a higher value.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Default [Auto] settings are used for [
], [
], and [
]
until you add a Picture Style.
●● You can also configure this setting by accessing MENU (= 30)
► [ 6] tab ► [Picture Style].
85
Emphasizes white clouds and green
trees in monochrome images.
N: Normal monochrome images with
no filter effect.
Ye: Blue skies look more natural and
white clouds stand out better.
Or: Blue skies look slightly darker.
Glow of sunsets is emphasized.
R: Blue skies look much darker.
Colored leaves look clearly
brighter.
G: Skin tones and lips of people look
muted. Green leaves of trees look
clearly brighter.
Available monochrome colors:
[N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue],
[P:Purple], or [G:Green].
Filter effect*2
Toning effect*2
*1
*2
Not available with [
Only available with [
].
].
2
Access the setting screen.
] button.
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to configure the
level of effect, and then choose an option,
either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
zzTo reset the changes, press the [
button.
zzWhen finished, press the [
You can customize basic styles, such as [
] and [
], and register
them. You can prepare several styles with different sharpness and
contrast settings.
1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose a destination Picture Style.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFollow the procedure in “Customizing
Colors (Picture Style)” (= 84) to
choose [
], [
], or [
].
zzPress the [
2
Other Shooting Modes
] button.
Choose a preset Picture Style.
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a preset Picture Style.
3
zzFollow the procedure in “Customizing
Colors (Picture Style)” (= 84) to
choose the required Picture Style.
zzPress the [
Basic Guide
Registering Customized Picture Styles
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● [Fineness] and [Threshold] of [Sharpness] are not applied to
movies.
1
Before Use
●● If you set higher [Contrast], [Filter effect] is more emphasized.
]
Customize the Picture Style.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item to modify, and then adjust the
setting, either by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
zzWhen finished, press the [
Setting Menu
] button.
Accessories
●● You can register the Picture Style with the camera using the
software CameraWindow (= 182). For registering to the camera,
refer to CameraWindow Help.
●● You can also choose a preset Picture Style by touching [
in step 1.
Appendix
Index
]
] button.
86
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Shooting Range and Focusing
Before Use
Still Images
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ].
For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (= 219).
1
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Choose [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [
] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
zz[
2
●● If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
Other Shooting Modes
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
P Mode
Specify the general focal position.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzReferring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnified display, turn
the [ ] dial to specify the general focal
position, and then press the [ ] button.
●● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [ ] (= 43).
●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [ ], and then touching it again.
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
position you specified. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting
Range” (= 219).
( 1)
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzYou can adjust the magnification by
pressing the [ ] button during magnified
display.
Setting Menu
zzYou can move the focusing frame by
dragging on the magnified display screen.
3
Accessories
Fine-tune the focus.
Appendix
zzPress the shutter button halfway or
touch [ ] to fine-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
zzTo cancel manual focus, choose [
step 1.
Index
] in
87
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
●● When you focus manually, the AF method (= 89) is [1-point
AF] and AF frame size (= 90) is [Normal], and these settings
cannot be changed.
●● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (= 41) or
digital tele-converter (= 89), or when using a TV as a display
(= 179), but the magnified display will not appear.
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
●● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
●● You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting
MENU (= 30) ► [ 4] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
●● To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ 4] tab ►
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
●● You can lock the focus during movie recording by touching [
[ ] is then displayed.
Before Use
].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the setting screen.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[MF Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,
choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]
(= 30).
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (= 30).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Playback Mode
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Wi-Fi Functions
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be set in three levels.
1
Choose [
Setting Menu
Accessories
].
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [ ] (= 30).
Appendix
Index
88
2
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
●● Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (= 95).
●● Continuous shooting (= 44) is not available in this mode.
●● You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
[
(= 87).
●● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [ ]
(= 43).
●● You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the
bar on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching
].
[
Digital Tele-Converter
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose the desired option (= 30).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThe view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
] for maximum telephoto, and when
lever all the way toward [
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following
step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (= 41).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images
Wi-Fi Functions
Movies
Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.
Setting Menu
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 30).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● You can also configure this setting by accessing MENU (= 30)
► [ 3] tab ► [AF method].
89
1-point AF
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)
Still Images
Movies
The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable
focusing. You can also move the frame by touching the screen (= 93).
●● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
●● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
method to [1-point AF].
1
Move the AF frame.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzTouch the screen. An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTurn the [ ] dial to move the AF frame,
and press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to
fine-tune the position.
zzTo return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [
button.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Resize the AF frame.
zzTo reduce the AF frame size, turn the
[ ] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
original size.
3
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Finish the setup process.
zzPress the [
Setting Menu
] button.
Accessories
●● AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (= 41) or digital tele-converter (= 89), and in manual
focus mode (= 87).
●● You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame
(= 79).
●● You can also configure the AF frame size by pressing the
] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ 3] tab
[
(= 30).
Appendix
Index
90
Shooting with Servo AF
+Tracking
Still Images
Movies
●● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
●● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
●● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
●● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
●● When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are
displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shutter button
halfway will display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that
the maximum number of frames depends on the aspect ratio
(= 49) setting.
●● If no faces are detected in Servo AF (= 91) mode, the AF
frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the
shutter button halfway.
●● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
-- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
-- Subjects that are dark or light
-- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
●● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
●● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ONE
SHOT] in the menu, and then choose
[SERVO] (= 30).
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Focus.
zzThe focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
●● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specified AF method.
●● Continuous shooting (= 44) is slower in Servo AF mode.
●● If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and
aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
●● AF lock shooting (= 94) is not available.
●● Not available when using the self-timer (= 42).
●● To have the camera keep adjusting the focus during continuous
shooting (= 44), specify Servo AF with [AF method] set to
[1-point AF].
●● You can also configure this setting by accessing MENU
(= 30) ► [ 3] tab ► [AF operation].
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
91
Changing the Focus Setting
Fine-Tuning the Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and
then choose [Off] (= 30).
Still Images
On
Off
Movies
You can fine-tune after auto focus using the control ring.
1
Configure the setting.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[AF+MF] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [On] (= 30).
2
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly.
Before Use
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Focus.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
3
P Mode
Fine-tune the focus.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzReferring to the on-screen MF indicator
(which shows the distance and focal
position) that is displayed by turning the
[ ] ring and the magnified display, turn
the [ ] ring to adjust the focus.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTo change the zoom factor of the
magnified display, press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzTo cancel focusing, release the shutter
button.
Accessories
4
Shoot.
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Appendix
Index
●● Cannot be used with Servo AF (= 91).
92
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(= 89).
2
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button or the
movie button (= 106).
3
Enter Face Select mode.
zzAim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button or the movie button.
zzAfter [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
zzEven if the subject moves, the face frame
[ ] follows the subject within a certain
range.
zzIf a face is not detected, [
displayed.
4
] is not
Choose the face to focus on.
zzTo switch the face frame [
detected face, press the [
the movie button.
] to another
] button or
zzOnce you cycle through all detected
faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed,
followed by the selected AF method
screen.
5
Shoot.
Before Use
zzPress the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered
person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other
registered people have been detected. However, their names will
be recorded in the still images (= 45).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images
P Mode
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(= 89).
2
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTouch the subject or person on the
screen.
Setting Menu
zzWhen the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
Accessories
zzTo cancel Touch AF, touch [
Appendix
].
Index
93
3
Shoot.
zzPress the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
●● If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,
make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the
] button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and
[
then choose [Disable] (= 30).
●● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
●● Even if you are shooting in [ ] mode (= 87), the camera will
revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to
focus.
●● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not be displayed when
registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded in
the still images (= 45). However, a name will be displayed if
the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected
with Face ID.
Shooting with the AF Lock
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Lock the focus.
Camera Basics
zzWith the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
zzThe focus is now locked, and [
the MF indicator are displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] and
zzTo unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [ ]
button again.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Compose the shot and shoot.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (= 44).
Playback Mode
●● When [AF method] is set to [1-point AF], you can lock the focus
by touching the screen during movie recording. To unlock the
focus, touch [ ].
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
94
Auto
Flash
Before Use
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
Changing the Flash Mode
On
Still Images
Movies
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the flash range, see “Camera” (= 217).
1
Raise the flash.
zzMove the [ ] switch.
2
Fires for each shot.
●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired option, and then touching it again.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
Other Shooting Modes
●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (= 52).
●● In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose a flash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
●● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the flash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the flash,
then configure the setting.
●● If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
Advanced Guide
Slow Synchro
Configure the setting.
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Basic Guide
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Off
Wi-Fi Functions
For shooting without the flash.
Setting Menu
●● A blinking [ ] icon may be displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions. In
this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
95
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (= 78), you can adjust the
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
zzRaise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose
the compensation level, and press the
[ ] button.
zzThe correction level you specified is now
displayed.
●● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for flash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (= 30) and
choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
●● You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (= 30) and choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash
Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (= 30)
when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately
] button.
pressing the [
●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (= 30) by
].
pressing the [ ] button and touching [
Shooting with the FE Lock
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (= 78), you can lock the exposure for flash
shots.
1
Raise the flash and set it to [ ]
(= 95).
2
Lock the flash exposure.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzThe flash fires, and when [ ] is
displayed, the flash output level is
retained.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo unlock FE, press the [ ] button again
with the shutter button pressed halfway.
In this case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Compose the shot and shoot.
Setting Menu
●● FE: Flash Exposure
●● You can also lock or unlock the exposure by touching [
setting screen in step 2.
Accessories
] on the
Appendix
Index
96
Changing the Flash Timing
Other Settings
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.
1
Configure the setting.
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
Choose from 7 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
(= 98). For guidelines on how many of each kind of image can fit on a
memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 220).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 29).
zzChoose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (= 30).
1st-curtain
2nd-curtain
Basic Guide
Changing Image Quality
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 30).
2
Before Use
The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.
The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
P Mode
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● [ ] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [ ] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more fit on a memory card.
Note that [ ] is image quality of [ ].
] mode.
●● Not available in [
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU (= 30)
► [ 1] tab ► [Image quality].
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
When deciding the number of pixels based on print size, use the following
table as a guide for images with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
Index
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
97
Capturing in RAW Format
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
JPEG Images
RAW Images
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality
and compressed to reduce file size. However, the
compression process is irreversible, and images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed
state. Image processing may also cause some loss
of image quality.
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially
no loss of image quality from the camera’s image
processing. The data cannot be used in this state
for viewing on a computer or printing. You must first
process images on the camera (= 132) or use the
software (Digital Photo Professional, = 182) to
convert images to JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be
adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 29).
zzTo capture in RAW format only, choose
the [ ] option.
zzTo capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
[ ] button. A [ ] mark is displayed next
to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow the
same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
●● When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (= 182).
●● Digital zoom (= 41) is not available when capturing images in
RAW format.
●● For details on the relationship between the number of recording
pixels and the number of shots that will fit on a card, see “Number
of Shots per Memory Card” (= 220).
●● The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using the Menu
Camera Basics
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 30).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo capture in RAW format at the same
time, turn the [ ] ring and choose
[ ] under [RAW]. Note that only JPEG
images are captured when [−] is selected.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [JPEG], and then choose
the image size and quality. Note that only
RAW images are captured when [−] is
selected.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzWhen finished, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen.
Wi-Fi Functions
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
●● [RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
98
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.
zzFollow the steps in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (= 52) to choose
[Shoot Only].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
99
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Camera” (= 217).
1
Enter [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Advanced Guide
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
2
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Set the shutter speed.
zzTurn the [ ] ring to set the shutter speed.
Other Shooting Modes
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
P Mode
customize the camera for your shooting style
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (= 80)
30 – 1.3
[AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
●● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
●● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (= 52).
●● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (= 101).
●● [
]: Time value
●● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [
changes the shutter speed (= 104).
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] dial
100
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Camera” (= 217).
1
Enter [
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
2
].
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
1
Enter [
2
(3)
(4)
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
].
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
zzTurn the [
(1).
(1) (2)
Advanced Guide
] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
zzTurn the [ ] ring to set the aperture
value.
●● [
]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
] and [
] modes, press the [
] button and set
●● In [
[Safety Shift] on the [ 6] tab to [On] (= 30) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
●● You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] dial
changes the aperture value (= 104).
Basic Guide
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”
(= 217).
Set the aperture value.
●● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
Before Use
P Mode
] dial to set the shutter speed
zzTurn the [ ] ring to set the aperture value
(2).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzWhen the ISO speed is fixed, an
exposure level mark (4) based on
your specified values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (3).
The exposure level mark is shown as [ ]
or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
Playback Mode
zzThe ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press
the shutter button halfway after setting
the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with your
specified shutter speed and aperture
value, the ISO speed is displayed in
orange.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
101
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (= 80)
[BULB], 30 – 1.3
[AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
●● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
●● Screen brightness may change depending on your specified
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ].
●● Image brightness may be affected by the Auto Lighting Optimizer
(= 81). To keep the Auto Lighting Optimizer disabled in [ ]
] on the Auto Lighting Optimizer setting screen to
mode, touch [
add a [ ] mark to [Disable during man expo].
●● [ ]: Manual
●● Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specified
metering method (= 79).
●● The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
-- Adjust exposure by turning the exposure compensation dial.
-- Touch [ ] to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness changes
accordingly.
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
Before Use
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
Basic Guide
1
Specify bulb exposure.
Advanced Guide
zzSet the shutter speed to [BULB],
following steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode)”
(= 101).
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
zzShots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Maximum continuous shooting time with this feature is 4 min.
16 sec.
●● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
stabilization (= 52).
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Remote shooting (= 164) function can be used to avoid camera
shake that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button
directly.
●● When [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again.
Be careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
102
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Choose from the three flash levels in [
1
][
][
Movies
] modes.
Specify the flash mode.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 30).
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Flash Mode], choose
[Manual], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Configure the setting.
zzRaise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose
the flash output level, and then press the
[ ] button.
zzOnce the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
]: Minimum, [
]: Medium, [
]:
[
Maximum
●● You can also set the flash level by accessing MENU (= 30)
and choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output].
●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (= 30)
when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately
] button.
pressing the [
●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (= 30) by
].
pressing the [ ] button and touching [
Still Images
Before Use
Basic Guide
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, exposure, aperture value, and ISO
speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Camera” (= 217).
For details on available aperture values and ISO speeds, see “Aperture”
(= 218) and “Changing the ISO Speed” (= 80).
1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
zzSet the mode dial to [
Other Shooting Modes
].
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 29).
2
P Mode
Configure the settings.
zzTurn the [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] dial to set the shutter speed.
Playback Mode
zzTurn the [ ] ring to set the aperture
value.
3
Wi-Fi Functions
Shoot.
Setting Menu
zzPress the movie button.
zzYou can also adjust settings while
recording, as described in step 2.
●● Some shutter speeds may cause flickering on the screen when
recording under fluorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
103
●● With the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode, you can also adjust the
exposure before recording by turning the exposure compensation
dial.
●● When the ISO speed is fixed, an exposure level mark based on
your specified value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [ ] or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
●● You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the
shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained
with your specified shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
●● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] (to
]) and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
switch it to [
Customization for Shooting Styles
Before Use
Basic Guide
Changing Control Ring Settings
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
Reassign control ring functions as follows. Using the control ring is an
enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera.
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a function to assign to the
[ ] ring.
zzPress the [
Other Shooting Modes
] button.
zzChoose an option, either by pressing the
[ ] or [ ][ ] buttons or by turning the
[ ] ring or [ ] dial.
zzPress the [
setting.
2
P Mode
] button to complete the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Configure the assigned function.
zzTurn the [ ] ring or the [ ] dial to
configure the assigned function.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching an option to choose it, and then touching it again.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
104
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring
Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting
mode. These then determine which functions you can assign to the
control dial.
Still Images
Av
Tv
1
–
–
–
ISO
ISO
Av
Tv
–
2
Correct white balance (= 83)
Perform seamless zoom (= 42)
Configure the effect of the Auto Lighting Optimizer
(= 81)
Adjust the aspect ratio (= 49)
–
Assign functions as desired (= 105)
●● ISO: ISO speed (= 80); MF: manual focus (= 87); Tv: shutter
speed (= 100); Av: aperture value (= 101).
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] to the [ ] ring, the
●● When you assign [
functions you can assign to the [ ] dial are the same as for [ ].
●● Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
], [
], or [
], step zoom or seamless
●● When using [
zoom can be assigned with the [ ] ring (= 41).
●● When in [ ] or [ ] mode, aperture value or shutter speed can
be assigned.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the shooting mode with
function to assign.
Focus manually (= 87)
Perform step zoom (= 41)
Choose [ ].
Basic Guide
zzFollowing step 1 in “Changing Control
Ring Settings” (= 104), choose [ ] and
press the [
] button.
Step Zoom
ISO
Movies
Assign functions to the control ring based on each shooting mode.
Shooting Mode
Item
Before Use
(1)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
ring to choose a function to assign to the
control ring (1).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzFunctions you can assign to the control
dial will be updated automatically.
Playback Mode
] button to return to the
zzPress the [
shooting screen.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● On the setting screen, you can also configure the functions
assigned to the control ring by touching the functions and then
].
[
●● You can also access the setting screen by choosing [ ] and
] in step 1 of “Changing Control Ring Settings”
touching [
(= 104).
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
105
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button on the
shooting screen. You can also customize what information is displayed.
1
Access the setting screen.
zzOn the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/
toggle settings] in [Shooting information
display], and then press the [ ] button
(= 30).
2
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose any screen you prefer not
to display, and then press the [ ] button
to remove the [ ] mark. Pressing the
[ ] button again will add the [ ] mark,
which indicates that it is selected for
display.
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
●● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
●● At least one option must be selected.
Customizing the Information Displayed
Before Use
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing
Display Information” (= 106) to choose
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [ ]
mark.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo see an example of display, press the
] button to return to the [Screen
[
info/ toggle settings] screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
information display] ► [Grid display].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Assigning Functions to Buttons
Still Images
Playback Mode
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the movie
button or the [ ] button.
1
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Set
button] or [Set
button] on the
[ 2] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(=30).
2
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a function to
assign, and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
106
3
Use the assigned function as
needed.
zzTo activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigned it to.
●● To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set
button] and
button].
[ ] in [Set
●● Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the
●● With [
assigned button in the [1-point AF] AF frame mode (= 90).
], each press of the button that it is assigned to adjusts
●● With [
] is displayed on the screen.
and locks the focus, and [
●● With [ ], pressing the button that it is assigned to deactivates
screen display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
-- Press any button other than the ON/OFF button
-- Hold the camera in another orientation
-- Open or close the screen
-- Raise or lower the flash
●● You can still record movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode
even if you assign a function to the movie button.
●● You can also configure settings by touching a desired option and
].
then touching it again or touching [
Customizing the Quick Set Menu
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Basic Guide
The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.
Advanced Guide
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
1
Camera Basics
Access the setting screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Quick
setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (= 30).
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
ring or the [ ] dial to choose an icon,
and then press the [ ] button to label
icons you want to display in the Quick Set
menu with [ ].
zzSelected items (labeled with a [
be included in display.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
]) will
Setting Menu
zzItems without a [ ] can be configured on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
3
Accessories
Complete the setting.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] ring or the [ ] dial), and then press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
●● Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.
●● The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[ ] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.
107
●● You can also choose an icon by touching it on the screen in
step 2.
Rearranging Menu Items
1
Access the setting screen.
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (= 107),
press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
ring or the [ ] dial to choose the icon
to replace, and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
ring or the [ ] dial to choose the new
position, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] ring or the [ ] dial), and then press
the [ ] button.
●● You can also replace an icon using drag.
Saving Shooting Settings
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch
shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be
retained this way.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Settings That Can Be Saved
●● Shooting modes ([ ], [
●● Items set in [ ], [
], [
], [
], and [
], and [
])
Other Shooting Modes
] modes (= 78 – = 101)
●● Shooting menu settings
P Mode
●● Zoom positions
●● Manual focus positions (= 87)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● My Menu settings (= 109)
1
2
Playback Mode
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
3
Save the settings.
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
108
●● To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],
change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
details are not applied in other shooting modes.
●● To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default
values, turn the mode dial to [ ] and choose [Reset All]
(= 176).
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly
from a single screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 30).
2
3
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Sort], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzChoose a menu item to move (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
zzPress the [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
P Mode
●● To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
] button in Shooting mode, set [Set default view] to [Yes].
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can
also touch items to select them.
●● On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the
display order.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select items], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
zz[
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] is displayed.
zzTo cancel saving, press the [
[ ] is no longer displayed.
zzPress the [
] button.
] button.
109
Viewing
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Advanced Guide
Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the [
Camera Basics
] button.
zzYour last shot is displayed.
Playback Mode
2
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
●● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
button to enter Playback mode.
Basic Guide
]
●● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose images.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTo access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzTo return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
zzTo browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
zzMovies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
Appendix
Index
] icon.
110
3
Play movies.
zzTo start playback, press the [ ] button to
access the movie control panel, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button again.
4
][
] buttons to adjust the
zzTo adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
5
zzTo view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjust the volume.
zzPress the [
volume.
(1)
Touch-Screen Operations
Pause playback.
zzTo pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
zzAfter the movie is finished, [
displayed.
] is
●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
5]
●● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (= 30) ► [
tab ► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
●● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
5] tab ► [Resume] ►
mode, choose MENU (= 30) ► [
[Last shot].
●● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
5] tab ►
(= 30) and choose your desired effect on the [
[Transition Effect].
Camera Basics
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzYou can also browse through images in
Scroll Display mode by dragging left or
right.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTouching the central image will restore
single-image display.
P Mode
zzTo browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag
up or down.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzTo start movie playback, touch [ ] on the
screen in step 2 of “Viewing” (= 110).
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTo adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
Setting Menu
zzTo stop playback, touch the screen. The
screen shown at left is displayed, and the
following operations are available.
zzTouch [ ] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzTo switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
zzTo resume playback, touch [ ].
] to return to the screen in
zzTouch [
step 2 of “Viewing” (= 110).
111
Switching Display Modes
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button in Playback mode to switch from “No Information
Display” to “Simple Information Display” to “Detailed Information Display”
to “RGB Histogram/GPS Information Display”.
No Information Display
Customize the information shown on each screen. Info Display 4 shows
the white balance information, and Info Display 5 shows the Picture Style
information.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the setting screen.
zzChoose [Playback information display]
on the [
6] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Simple Information Display
Before Use
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Choose information to display.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
information to display, and then press the
[ ] button to add a [ ] mark.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Playback Mode
●● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
Detailed Information Display
Wi-Fi Functions
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Setting Menu
Movies
Accessories
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
information display (= 112).
RGB Histogram, GPS Information
Display
Appendix
Index
●● Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
112
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
zzThe graph in detailed information display
(= 112) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
zzThe histogram can also be accessed
while shooting (= 106, = 197).
●● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
●● You can also display an RGB histogram at the top of the Info
Display 2 – 6 screens. Choose Info Display 2 – 5 on the [Playback
information display] setting screen on the [ 6] tab, press the
[ ] button, press the [ ][ ]buttons to choose [RGB], and then
press the [ ] button. Note that the brightness histogram is now
displayed at the bottom of the Info Display 3 screen.
●● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
●● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images
P Mode
Movies
zzThe RGB histogram shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
zzUsing a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(= 164). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
zzLatitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
●● You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images
only) and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of
the screen upward or downward in detailed information display.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
113
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
View digest movies recorded automatically in [
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
] mode (= 36) on a
zzStill images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with [ ] icon.
2
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (= 112),
the names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID (= 45)
will be displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image.
Choose an image.
zzChoose a still image labeled with [
and press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzNames will be displayed on detected
people.
]
Play the digest movie.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [
and then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
],
Other Shooting Modes
●● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
3] tab ► [Face ID Info]
Face ID, choose MENU (= 30) ► [
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● After a moment, [
] will no longer be displayed when you are
using the camera with information display deactivated (= 112).
Setting Menu
Viewing by Date
Accessories
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [
2] tab,
and then touch a date (= 30).
Appendix
Index
114
Touch-Screen Operations
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
zzMove the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
zzTo display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
zzTurn the [
images.
zzPress the [
an image.
] dial to scroll through the
][
][ ][ ] buttons to choose
zzAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
zzPress the [ ] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
zzPinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
Basic Guide
zzTo view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
Advanced Guide
zzDrag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
Camera Basics
zzTo view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your fingers apart.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTouch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions
Still Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Movies
Playback Mode
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
(= 121) or delete (= 123) these images all at once.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (= 126).
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/
Movie
Name
●● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
5] tab ► [Index
[ ][ ] buttons), choose MENU (= 30) ► [
Effect] ► [Off].
Before Use
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[ ] mode (= 36).
Appendix
Displays images of a registered person (= 45).
Index
115
1
Choose the first condition.
zzIn single-image display, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
choose a condition.
zzWhen [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [ ]
button and go to step 3.
2
Choose the second condition and
view the filtered images.
zzWhen you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the first condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
●● To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in step 3.
●● Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 115), “Magnifying
Images” (= 119), and “Viewing Slideshows” (= 120). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (= 121) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(= 124), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 187),
or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 190).
●● If you edit images and save them as new images (= 128 –
= 135), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in
steps 1 and 2.
●● After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo switch to filtered image display, press
the [ ] button and go to step 3.
Playback Mode
zzWhen you have selected [ ] as the first
condition, press the [ ] button, and
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the
next screen to choose a person.
3
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
View the filtered images.
zzImages matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons,
or turn the [ ] dial.
zzTo cancel filtered display, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
then press the [ ] button again.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
116
Using the Control Ring to Jump between
Images
Still Images
Touch-Screen Operations
Movies
Use the control ring to find and jump between desired images quickly by
filtering image display according to your specified conditions.
Jump to Favorites
Jump Shot Date
Displays images tagged as favorites
(= 126).
Jumps to the first image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Single image
Jumps by 1 image at a time.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1
Choose a condition.
zzChoose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the [ ]
ring and immediately pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2
View images matching your
specified condition, or jump by the
specified amount.
zzTurn the [ ] ring to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specified number of images forward or
back.
Before Use
zzYou can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Control
Ring to Jump between Images” (= 117)
by dragging left or right with two fingers.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
Images saved as source data in [ ] mode (= 68) are grouped, and
only the first image is displayed. However, you can also view the images
individually.
1
P Mode
Choose a grouped image.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[
].
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2
Choose [
].
Setting Menu
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 29).
3
Accessories
Appendix
View images in the group
individually.
Index
zzPressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the
group.
zzTo cancel group playback, press the [
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (= 29).
]
117
●● During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 115) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (= 119). You can apply your
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (= 121), [All Images in
Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 124), [Select All
in Group] in “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 187),
or [Select All in Group] in “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(= 190).
●● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single
5] tab ► [Group
still images, choose MENU (= 30) ► [
Images] ► [Off] (= 30). However, grouped images cannot be
ungrouped during individual playback.
Editing Face ID Information
Before Use
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Changing Names
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [
] button and choose
3] tab (= 30).
[Face ID Info] on the [
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
P Mode
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose an image.
Playback Mode
zzFollowing the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (= 114),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose the editing option.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
118
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
zzFollow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (= 48) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Image Viewing Options
Basic Guide
Magnifying Images
Still Images
1
●● You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
] to display the
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
●● You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Movies
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Magnify an image.
zzMoving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You can
magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
Erasing Names
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
zzOn the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (= 118), choose
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Before Use
P Mode
zzTo zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [ ]. You can return to singleimage display by continuing to hold it.
(1)
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTo move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Setting Menu
zzTo switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [ ] dial.
Accessories
●● You can return to single-image display from magnified display by
] button.
pressing the [
] is displayed by pressing
●● You can check the focus when [
the [ ] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).
When multiple positions are in focus, press the [ ] button
repeatedly to switch to other positions.
Appendix
Index
119
Touch-Screen Operations
zzSpread your fingers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
zzYou can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
zzTo move the display position, drag across
the screen.
zzPinch in to zoom out.
zzTouch [
display.
] to restore single-image
●● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
●● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fastrewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.
●● You can configure slideshow repetition, display time per image,
and the transition between images on the screen accessed by
choosing [Set up] and pressing the [ ] button (= 30).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Viewing Slideshows
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Still Images
Movies
Playback Mode
Automatically play back images from a memory card.
zzPress the [
] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [
1] tab
(= 30).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
[ ] button.
Accessories
zzThe slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
zzPress the [
slideshow.
Appendix
] button to stop the
Index
●● The camera’s power-saving functions (= 27) are deactivated
during slideshows.
120
Choosing Images Individually
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (= 123).
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [
] in
the menu, and then choose [
] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial). [ ] is displayed.
zzTo cancel protection, choose [OFF].
[ ] is no longer displayed.
●● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (= 169).
●● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Protect] on the [
1] tab (= 30).
1
Choose [Select].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (= 121), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose an image.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
P Mode
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Protect the image.
zzPress the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Playback Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
2
Choose a selection method.
zzChoose an option as desired (= 30).
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Accessories
Appendix
●● You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the confirmation screen by touching
].
[
●● You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
Index
121
4
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (= 121), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Protect the images.
zzPress the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● You can also choose the first or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
●● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● You can also display the screen for choosing the first or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
●● You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Protecting All Images at Once
3
Choose an ending image.
zzPress the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
1
zzImages before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Choose [Protect All Images].
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (= 121), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Protect the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Appendix
Index
122
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
Erasing Images
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (= 121) cannot be erased.
1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose an image to erase.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
2
Basic Guide
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Erase the image.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ] button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe current image is now erased.
Playback Mode
zzTo cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, pressing the
[ ] button while the image is displayed gives you the option of
], or [Erase
].
choosing [Erase ], [Erase
Setting Menu
●● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
●● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 127).
Appendix
Accessories
Index
123
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (= 121) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [
1] tab
(= 30).
2
Choose a selection method.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 124), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose an image.
zzOnce you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(= 121), [ ] is displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
P Mode
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Erase the images.
zzPress the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Playback Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
124
Selecting a Range
Rotating Images
1
Choose [Select Range].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 124), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Advanced Guide
Choose [ ].
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 29).
Choose images.
Camera Basics
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 122) to specify images.
3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
Erase the images.
zzPress the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 124), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Erase the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
Rotate the image.
zzPress the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(= 126).
Wi-Fi Functions
Using the Menu
Setting Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
zzPress the [
[Rotate] on the [
Accessories
] button and choose
1] tab (= 30).
Appendix
Index
125
2
Rotate the image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
zzThe image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [ ] button.
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
●● On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [
] to rotate
] to return to the menu screen.
images or touch [
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● “Viewing” (= 110), “Viewing Slideshows” (= 120), “Protecting
Images” (= 121), “Erasing Images” (= 123), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (= 187), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(= 190)
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 29).
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [OFF], and then press the
[ ] button.
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Using the Menu
Playback Mode
1
●● Images cannot be rotated (= 125) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [
5] tab, and then
choose [Off] (= 30).
Before Use
Wi-Fi Functions
Choose [Favorites].
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [
1] tab (= 30).
Setting Menu
Accessories
2
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
Appendix
Index
zzTo untag the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
126
3
Complete the setting.
zzPress the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using Touch Actions Functions
Camera Basics
zzDrag across the screen as shown.
zzThe function assigned to [
activated.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] is now
Other Shooting Modes
●● Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (= 136).
●● You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
●● Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(= 127).
P Mode
zzSimilarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzCustomize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Setting Menu
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
1
Accessories
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [
tab (= 30).
Appendix
6]
Index
127
2
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a function to assign.
]
Assignable Functions
Slideshow
Erase
Protect
Rotate
Favorites
Next Favorite
Previous Favorite
Next Date
Previous Date
To Camera
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
To Web Service
Start a slideshow.
Erase an image.
Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate an image.
Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as
a favorite.
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged
as a favorite.
Switch to displaying the first image with the
next shooting date.
Switch to displaying the first image with the
previous shooting date.
Editing Still Images
Basic Guide
●● Image editing (= 128 – = 131) is only available when the
memory card has sufficient free space.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● You can access editing screens for various functions by touching
an image after choosing the function in the menu.
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
●● When [
] instead of pressing the [
] button, if you prefer.
[
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
●● When [
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
[
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Resizing Images
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Playback Mode
Choose an image size.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an image size
(= 29).
zzPress the [
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions”
(= 141).
Before Use
2
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
] button.
Accessories
Save the new image.
zzAfter [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Appendix
Index
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.
128
3
4
Review the new image.
] button and follow
zzPress the [
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (= 128).
zzThe saved image is now displayed.
●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [ ].
●● RAW images cannot be edited.
●● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
●● You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen
in step 3.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Resize].
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Resize] on the [
3] tab (= 30).
2
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
Save as a new image and review.
zzFollow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(= 128).
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Cropping
Camera Basics
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
1
Access the setting screen.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(= 29).
2
P Mode
Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Playback Mode
zzTo move the frame, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzTo change the frame orientation, turn the
[ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzTo change the frame aspect ratio, turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ]. To switch
between aspect ratios ([ ], [
],
[ ], and [ ]), press the [ ] button
repeatedly.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
129
3
Preview the cropped image.
zzTurn the [
] dial to choose [
].
zzTo switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
[ ] button repeatedly.
4
Save as a new image and review.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(= 128).
●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [ ] or resized to [ ] (= 128).
●● RAW images cannot be edited.
●● Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
●● Cropped images cannot be resized or have Creative filters
applied.
●● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
●● While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
]
●● Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [
3] tab ► [Cropping], pressing the [ ]
button, choosing [
button, choosing an image, and pressing the [ ] button again.
●● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (= 45), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
●● You can also move the cropping frame in step 2 by dragging it.
You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (= 120) on the
screen.
], and
●● Operations are also possible by touching [ ], [ ], [
[ ] on the top of the screen in step 2.
Applying Filter Effects
Before Use
Apply effects equivalent to shooting in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
[ ] modes to images and save them as separate images.
1
], [
], and
Choose an effect.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose the effect
(= 29).
zzPress the [
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
Adjust the effect as needed.
Other Shooting Modes
zz[ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
contrast.
P Mode
zz[ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
defocusing.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zz[ ] or [ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
adjust the level of the effect.
Playback Mode
zz[ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
color saturation.
Wi-Fi Functions
]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
zz[
color tone.
Setting Menu
zz[ ]: Move the zoom lever to resize the
frame, and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
3
Accessories
Save as a new image and review.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(= 128).
Appendix
Index
130
3
●● [ ]: To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press
the [ ][ ] buttons on the screen in step 2. To move the frame,
press the [ ][ ] buttons again. To return the frame to horizontal
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
]
●● The same operations are available by pressing the [
button and choosing [ 2] tab ► [Creative filters], choosing an
image, and pressing the [ ] button.
zzEnlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(= 119).
Correcting Red-Eye
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Save as a new image and review.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate file.
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
P Mode
] button and follow
zzPress the [
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (= 128).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
●● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
●● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
●● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
●● Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
zzPress the [
] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the
[
3] tab (= 30).
2
4
Before Use
] button.
zzRed-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
●● You can also adjust the effect by touching or dragging the bar on
the bottom of the screen in step 2. For [ ], you can also move
the frame by touching or dragging across the screen.
1
Correct the image.
zzPress the [
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
]
●● You can also save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite]
on the screen in step 4.
Appendix
Index
131
5
Processing RAW Images on the Camera
Still Images
Movies
You can process RAW images on the camera. Save RAW images as
JPEG images while leaving the originals.
1
Choose a RAW image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a RAW image.
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
zzIf you chose [
], go to step 5.
Configure the processing method.
zzIf you chose [ ], press the [ ] button,
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Before Use
zzIf you chose [ ], press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
]
zzPress the [ ] button to choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose the desired
option, either by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
3
Save the settings.
zzIf you chose [ ], press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], press the [ ]
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Configure advanced settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the effect, and then press
the [ ] button to return to the screen in
step 3.
Other Shooting Modes
Brightness
adjustment
White Balance
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
High ISO speed NR
Image quality
Adjust brightness.
P Mode
Choose the white balance.
Choose a Picture Style type.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Configure the Auto Lighting Optimizer settings.
Playback Mode
Configure the noise reduction settings.
Configure the image quality when creating
JPEG images.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● You can also choose an effect for each option by turning the [ ]
dial while an option is selected on the screen in step 3.
●● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] on the screen in step 3 will
zoom in and magnify the image.
]
●● To compare the image with the shot image, press the [
button, and then turn the [ ] dial on the screen in step 3.
] button.
To return to the setting screen, press the [
●● To revert to the settings used for shooting, press the [ ] button
on the screen in step 3.
] displayed on the screen in step 4,
●● For functions with [
you can configure more advanced settings by pressing the [ ]
button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
132
3
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, and then
choose the [
3] tab ► [RAW img
processing] (= 132).
2
Choose a selection method.
zzChoose the desired option (= 30).
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Choose [Select].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (= 133), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
zzOnce you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(= 121), [ ] is displayed.
zzTo deselect the image, press the [ ]
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
zzPress the [
setting screen.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Selecting a Range
1
Camera Basics
Choose [Select Range].
zzFollow the procedure in “Using the Menu”
(= 129) to choose [Select Range], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Choose images.
P Mode
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 122) to choose images.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Process the images.
zzFollow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images on the Camera” (= 132) to
process images.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Process the images.
zzFollow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images on the Camera” (= 132) to
process images.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Images processed on the camera and the ones processed using
Digital Photo Professional will not be exactly the same.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● Up to 500 images can be chosen at a time.
●● To choose the processing method from the menu, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired option in step 3.
Appendix
Index
] button to go to the
133
3
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of
movies.
1
zzTo edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
Choose [ ].
zzFollowing steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(= 110), choose [ ] and press the [
button.
]
zzThe movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
(1)
2
Specify portions to cut.
zz(1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
zzPress the [
or [ ].
(2)
][
] buttons to choose [
Review the edited movie.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
The edited movie is now played.
]
zzTo specify a portion to cut (indicated by
[ ]), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to move the orange [ ] or
[ ] icon. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
zzIf you move [ ] or [ ] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion
before the nearest [ ] mark on the left
will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after
the nearest [ ] mark on the right will
be cut.
]
zzTo cancel editing, press the [
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Save the edited movie.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzChoose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
zzThe movie is now saved as a new file.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
●● If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
●● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
●● Using a fully charged battery pack is recommended when editing
movies.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
134
Reducing File Sizes
Editing Short Movies
Before Use
Still Images
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
zzChoose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Image Quality of Compressed Movies
Before Compression
After Compression
,
,
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Select the clip to erase.
Camera Basics
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (= 114) to
play a short movie, and press the [ ]
button to access the movie control panel.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button to choose a clip.
2
●● [
][
] movies cannot be compressed.
●● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
] or [
] reduces the file
●● Compressing movies to [
size while maintaining the same image quality.
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (= 36) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Erased chapters cannot be recovered. Be sure that
you want to erase the chapters before using this option.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose [ ].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzThe selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Setting Menu
Confirm erasure.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzThe clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
Appendix
Index
●● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
135
1
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose the theme
for the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the
camera is more likely to add images tagged as favorites (= 126) to
albums.
Date
Person’s
name
Event
Custom
Choose an image.
Before Use
zzChoose an image in single-image display.
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as
the image displayed before you access the home screen.
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject
shot during the same month as the image displayed before
you access the home screen.
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event
before and after the image displayed before you access
the home screen.
Includes images based on your specified images, dates,
or people registered in Face ID.
zzThemes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the home screen.
zzPress the [
Camera Basics
] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAfter [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3
Other Shooting Modes
Preview an album.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
person or [Date] or [Event] as the album
theme, and then press the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzAfter [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
4
Playback Mode
Save the album.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save Album as Movie], and then press
the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzOnce the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Accessories
Play the album (= 110).
Appendix
Index
136
●● Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
-- Still Images
-- Digest movies (= 36), except compressed movies
-- Short clips (= 74) of two seconds or longer, except
compressed movies
●● Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
●● To jump to the next chapter during the preview, drag left, and to
jump to the previous chapter, drag right.
●● You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [ ] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [ ] button.
●● To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [ ] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [ ] button again.
Adding Background Music to Albums
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
1
Register background music to a
memory card.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (= 136), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ]
button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe screen at left is displayed when
you use a new or recently formatted
memory card. Choose [OK] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
press the [ ] button, and wait about four
minutes until the seven types of music
are registered to the card.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzWhen using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
2
Wi-Fi Functions
Create the album.
zzFollow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (= 136) to create an
album.
3
Accessories
Configure background music
settings.
zzChoose the required item, press the
[ ] button, and then choose an option
(= 30).
4
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
Save the album.
zzFollow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (= 136) to save albums.
137
●● Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
●● Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(= 135).
●● If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
●● To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
●● To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [ ]
button.
Creating Your Own Albums
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1
Choose to create a Custom album.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzFollowing steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (= 136), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a selection method.
zzChoose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose album elements.
zzOnce you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
] button after you
zzPress the [
finish selecting still images or short
clips in [Image Selection], dates in
[Date Selection], or people in [Person
Selection].
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
138
4
Choose background music.
zzWhen the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
music as described in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (= 137),
and then press the [
] button.
5
Choose a color effect.
zzOn the screen in step 4 of “Viewing
Albums (Story Highlights)” (= 136),
choose [Change Color Effect].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
color effect, and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Save the album.
zzFollow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (= 136) to save albums.
●● You can specify up to 40 files (or 10 movie files) after choosing
[Image Selection]. From the second time you create a custom
album, [Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed.
If you choose [Yes], the previous still images or short clips are
labeled with [ ], and multiple images are displayed at once.
●● Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
Combining Short Clips
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
albums (= 136).
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Access the editing screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Short
Clip Mix] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Merge
Clips] (= 30).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
2
P Mode
Specify clips to combine.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a clip to combine from the
top of the screen, and then press the [ ]
button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzYour selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
zzTo cancel selection, press the [
again.
Wi-Fi Functions
] button
Setting Menu
zzRepeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
Accessories
zzAfter you are finished selecting clips,
] button.
press the [
3
Appendix
Preview the movie.
zzChoose [Preview] and press the [
button.
]
Index
zzAfter [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
139
4
Save the movie.
zzChoose [Save], and then press the [
button.
Before Use
]
zzOnce the movie is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Play the movie.
Camera Basics
zzChoose [Play Back
Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose the movie to play and press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
●● From the second time you create a custom album, [Select images
based on previous settings?] is displayed. If you choose [Yes], the
editing screen is displayed with the short clips in the previously
selected order.
] on the
●● To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [
screen in step 2.
●● To rearrange clips, press the [ ] button on the screen in step 2,
select a clip, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.
●● To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the
screen in step 3.
●● To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen
in step 3 (= 137).
●● The image quality of movies saved is [ ].
●● Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
140
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
●● Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions” (= 224).
Available Wi-Fi Features
Before Use
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
Basic Guide
●● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected
via Wi‑Fi.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
141
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
●● Connect via NFC (= 142)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
●● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (= 144)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
●● Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the
process of installing Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
and geotag your shots (= 164). It is easy to reconnect to recent
devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection.
P Mode
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode
1
Wi-Fi Functions
Install Camera Connect.
Setting Menu
zzActivate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
142
2
Establish the connection.
zzMake sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
zzTouch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
zzThe camera screen automatically
changes.
zzIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzCamera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
zzThe devices are connected automatically.
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
zzWhen this screen is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
zzYou can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
4
Send an image.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
zz[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzTo end the connection, press the
] button, choose [OK] on the
[
confirmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
●● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
-- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone.
This may damage the devices.
-- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
-- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
-- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
●● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (= 165).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
143
●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (= 32).
●● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ).
For details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (= 159).
●● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (= 30) ► [ 4] tab
► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [NFC] ► [Off].
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode
zzPress the [
on.
] button to turn the camera
zzTouch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (= 142) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to send,
and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is
displayed.
zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
zzAfter you finish choosing images, press
the [
] button, choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then
press the [ ] button.
●● If during connection a message on the camera requests you to
enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Connecting via NFC When
Camera Is Off or in Shooting Mode” (= 142) to enter it.
●● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
●● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (= 161).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Adding a Smartphone
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (= 146).
1
Other Shooting Modes
Install Camera Connect.
P Mode
zzFor an iPhone or iPad, find Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzFor Android smartphones, find Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
] button.
Setting Menu
zzIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK] (= 142).
3
Accessories
Choose [ ].
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
zzThe images are now sent.
144
4
Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzThe camera SSID and password are
displayed.
5
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
zzIn the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
zzIn the password field, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
6
Start Camera Connect.
zzStart Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
7
Select the camera to connect to.
zzOn the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
8
Adjust the privacy setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzYou can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Send an image.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zz[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzTo add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.
●● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (= 165).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
145
●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
connections will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Target History] ► [Off].
●● To connect without entering a password in step 5, choose MENU
(= 30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Password] ► [Off]. [Password] will no longer be displayed on the
SSID screen (in step 4).
●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (= 159).
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzAccess the [Waiting to connect] screen
by following steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone” (= 144).
2
3
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [Switch Network].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzA list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4
Wi-Fi Functions
Connect to the access point.
zzFor WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone as described in
steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (= 149).
zzFor non-WPS access points, follow
steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed
Access Points” (= 151) to connect to the
access point and choose the smartphone.
5
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Select the camera to connect to.
zzOn the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
146
6
Configure the privacy settings and
send images.
zzFollow steps 8 – 9 in “Adding a
Smartphone” (= 144) to configure the
privacy settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Adding a Smartphone” (= 144).
●● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (= 146) from step 4.
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, such
as computers that can be connected via Wi-Fi to the camera, including
support for new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
●● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.9 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1
Playback Mode
Download the software.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzVisit the following site from a computer
connected to the Internet.
Setting Menu
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
Accessories
zzChoose your country or region, and
then follow the instructions displayed to
prepare for downloading.
zzThe compressed software is now
downloaded to your computer.
Appendix
Index
147
2
Begin the installation.
zzDouble-click the downloaded file, and
when the screen at left is displayed, click
[Easy Installation]. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the installation
process.
zzInstallation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
zzClick [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
●● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
●● To uninstall the software, follow these steps.
-- Windows: Select [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon
Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation.
-- Mac OS: In the [Canon Utilities] folder within the [Applications]
folder, drag the folder of the software for uninstallation to the
Trash, and then empty the Trash.
Configure the computer for a Wi-Fi connection
(Windows only)
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzFor instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
Other Shooting Modes
zzClick in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzIn the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
●● The following Windows settings are configured when you run the
utility in step 2.
-- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
-- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.
-- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
-- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
●● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
148
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Camera” (= 217).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, = 149) or not (= 151).
For non‑WPS access points, check the following information.
●● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
●● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission.
Check which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
●● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission.
Also called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
●● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication /
data encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
●● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
●● These settings are very important for network security.
Exercise adequate caution when changing these settings.
●● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
●● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
●● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as
“access points”.
●● If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You
can check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU
(= 30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Check MAC Address].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
P Mode
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFor instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Setting Menu
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
Accessories
] button.
Appendix
Index
149
zzIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [
].
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [WPS Connection].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose [PBC Method].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
7
Establish the connection.
Before Use
zzOn the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
Basic Guide
zzOn the camera, press the [
go to the next step.
Advanced Guide
] button to
zzThe camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose the target device.
Other Shooting Modes
zzChoose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
9
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Install a driver (first Windows
connection only).
Playback Mode
zzWhen this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzDouble-click the connected camera icon.
zzDriver installation will begin.
zzAfter driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
Appendix
Index
150
10
Display CameraWindow.
zzWindows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
zzMac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
11
Import images.
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
zzClick [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
zzUse Digital Photo Professional to view
images you save to a computer. To view
movies, use preinstalled or commonly
available software compatible with
movies recorded by the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Target History] ► [Off].
●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (= 32).
●● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
●● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
●● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
View the listed access points.
zzView the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(= 149).
2
Choose an access point.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
151
3
Enter the access point password.
zzPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(= 32).
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzTo save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(= 149).
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 149).
●● To connect to a device via an access point, confirm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(= 149).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 149)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(= 151) from step 2.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
●● If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
●● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
152
Sending Images to a Registered Web
Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
●● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
●● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
●● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website
(http://www.canon.com/cig/).
●● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
●● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
●● CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note
that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone to receive a notification message for completing linkage
settings.
1
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
Choose [
Playback Mode
].
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
zzRead the displayed content, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [I Agree], and then press the [ ]
button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
153
4
Establish a connection with an
access point.
zzConnect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (= 149) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(= 151).
5
Enter your email address.
zzOnce the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an email
address.
zzEnter your e-mail address, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Next], and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Enter a four-digit number.
zzEnter any four-digit number, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Next], and then press the [ ]
button.
zzYou will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
7
Check for the notification message.
zzOnce information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receive a notification message at the
email address entered in step 5.
zzThe screen is displayed to notify that the
e-mail notification was sent. Press the
[ ] button.
zz[
8
] now changes to [
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Access the page in the notification
message and complete camera link
settings.
P Mode
zzFrom a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notification
message.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzFollow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
9
Wi-Fi Functions
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
Setting Menu
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
], and then
press the [ ] button.
zz[ ] (= 162) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
zzYou can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
instructions from step 2 in “Registering
Other Web Services” (= 155).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
154
●● Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
application is not configured to block email from relevant domains,
which may prevent you from receiving the notification message.
●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 1 (= 166).
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
configure the setting.
●● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(= 127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
3
Choose [
zzPress the [
].
Before Use
] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzThe Web service settings are now
updated.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Registering Other Web Services
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
1
Playback Mode
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzFrom a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
2
Accessories
Configure the Web service you want
to use.
zzFollow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
Appendix
Index
155
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
2
] button.
Choose the destination.
●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (= 159).
●● To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose the Web service icon (either
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
Other Shooting Modes
zzIf multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
3
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Send an image.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzWhen uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
zzAfter the image is sent, [OK] is displayed
on the screen. Press the [ ] button to
return to the playback screen.
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
156
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (= 146).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
2
Choose [
] button.
Connect the printer to the network.
zzIn the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
Basic Guide
zzIn the password field, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
5
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose the printer.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
].
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
4
Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzThe camera SSID and password are
displayed.
6
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
7
P Mode
Choose an image to print.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Access the printing screen.
Playback Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
8
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Print the image.
Accessories
zzFor detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (= 184).
zzTo end the connection, press the [ ]
button at step 6, choose [OK] on the
confirmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
157
●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Target History] ► [Off].
●● To connect without entering a password in step 4, choose MENU
(= 30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Password] ► [Off]. [Password] will no longer be displayed on the
SSID screen (in step 3).
●● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (= 146).
Sending Images to Another Camera
Before Use
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
Basic Guide
●● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera
that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports FlashAir/Eye-Fi
cards.
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
2
Choose [
P Mode
].
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzFollow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
Accessories
zzCamera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
Appendix
Index
158
4
Send an image.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
zz[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
zzTo end the connection, press the
] button, choose [OK] on the
[
confirmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Target History] ► [Off].
●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (= 159, = 161).
●● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(= 127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Image Sending Options
Before Use
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending Multiple Images
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [Select and send].
zzOn the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
Choose a selection method.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a selection method.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
]
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Choosing Images Individually
1
Setting Menu
Choose [Select].
Accessories
zzFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (= 159), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
159
2
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
zzAfter you finish choosing images, press
] button.
the [
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Send the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [ ] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
zzFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (= 159), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 122) to specify images.
zzTo include movies, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Send the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Sending Favorite Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Send only images tagged as favorites (= 126).
1
Playback Mode
Choose [Favorite Images].
zzFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (= 159), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzAn image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
[ ] button to remove [ ].
zzAfter you finish choosing images, press
] button, choose [OK], and
the [
then press the [ ] button.
2
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Send the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
160
●● In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
Notes on Sending Images
●● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
●● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
●● For movies that you do not compress (= 135), a separate,
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
●● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
●● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
●● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
●● Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
●● Movies cannot be resized.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Image size can also be configured in MENU (= 30) ► [ 4] tab
► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
P Mode
Adding Comments
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
1
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Access the screen for adding
comments.
Setting Menu
zzOn the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
3
Accessories
Appendix
Add a comment (= 32).
Send the image.
Index
●● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
●● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them.
The same comment is added to all images sent together.
161
Preparing the Computer
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.
1
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, you will
install and configure Image Transfer Utility, a free software compatible with
Image Sync.
Add [ ] as a destination.
zzAdd [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(= 153).
zzTo include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (= 153), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
2
Basic Guide
Install Image Transfer Utility.
Advanced Guide
zzInstall Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
(= 147).
Initial Preparations
1
Before Use
Camera Basics
zzImage Transfer Utility can also be
downloaded from the Image Sync
settings page of CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (= 153).
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Register the camera.
zzWindows: In the taskbar, right-click [
and then click [Add new camera].
zzMac OS: In the menu bar, click [
then click [Add new camera].
P Mode
],
], and
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzA list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzOnce the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [ ].
Setting Menu
Accessories
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] (= 30).
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
]
162
Sending Images
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to
Web Services” (=156) and choose [ ].
zzSent images are labeled with a [
2
] icon.
Save the images to the computer.
zzImages are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
zzImages are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
●● Using a fully charged battery pack is recommended when sending
images.
●● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
●● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY,
so the computer must be connected to the Internet.
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (= 162).
Camera Basics
●● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (= 153), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
●● Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
163
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
●● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
●● Geotag images on the camera (= 164)
●● Shoot remotely (= 164)
●● Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (= 144, = 165).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
Shooting Remotely
Before Use
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
zzTurn the mode dial to choose [ ], [
[
], [ ], or [ ] as the mode.
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
],
Camera Basics
Secure the camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzOnce remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
3
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Connect the camera and
smartphone (= 144).
Playback Mode
zzIn the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
●● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (= 20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (= 172)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
●● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
4
Wi-Fi Functions
Choose remote shooting.
zzIn Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
Setting Menu
zzThe camera lens will come out. Keep
your fingers away from the lens, and
make sure no objects will obstruct it.
Accessories
zzOnce the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
zzAt this time, a message is displayed
on the camera, and all operations
except pressing the ON/OFF button are
disabled.
5
Appendix
Index
Shoot.
zzUse the smartphone to shoot.
164
●● [ ] mode is used for shooting in modes other than [ ], [
],
], [ ], and [ ]. However, some Quick Set and MENU
[
settings you have configured in advance may be changed
automatically.
●● Movie shooting is not available.
●● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
●● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Before Use
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Basic Guide
Editing Connection Information
1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
zzPress the [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [Edit a Device].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Choose the device to edit.
Setting Menu
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Accessories
Choose the item to edit.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
zzThe items you can change depend on the
device or service.
Appendix
Index
165
Changing the Camera Nickname
Connection
Configurable Items
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(= 166)
O
O
O
O
–
[View Settings] (= 144)
–
O
–
–
–
[Erase Connection Info] (= 166)
O
O
O
O
–
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(= 30).
Camera Basics
O : Configurable – : Not configurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
zzFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (= 165), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
zzSelect the input field and press the [ ]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (= 32).
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [Nickname].
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Nickname], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Change the nickname.
Playback Mode
zzPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (= 32), and then enter a
nickname.
Wi-Fi Functions
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
zzFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (= 165), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Setting Menu
●● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
●● You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you first use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzThe connection information will be
erased.
166
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings.
Be sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Wireless settings].
Camera Basics
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(= 30).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Restore the default settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzThe Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
Accessories
●● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [ 4] tab (= 176).
Appendix
Index
167
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Before Use
MENU (= 30) settings on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3], and [ 4] tabs can be
configured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Date-Based Image Storage
Setting Menu
Camera Basics
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose [Create Folder] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
Other Shooting Modes
zzImages will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
P Mode
greater convenience
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
File Numbering
Playback Mode
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzChoose [File Numbering] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Continuous
Auto Reset
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory
cards.
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
Index
168
●● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted, = 169) memory card.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
zzChoose [Format] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [OK].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
zzTo begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
zzWhen formatting is finished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [ ] button.
●● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, such as
physically destroying the cards.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Low-Level Formatting
Other Shooting Modes
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before lowlevel formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (= 169), press the [ ]
button to choose [Low Level Format].
A [ ] icon is displayed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFollow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (= 169) to continue with the
formatting process.
●● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (= 169), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
●● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
169
Changing the Video System
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
zzChoose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzChoose [Video system] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
zzChoose [Reset], and then press the [
button.
zzChoose [OK], and then press the [
button.
Camera Basics
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Start-Up Screen
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (= 106) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1
Before Use
Make sure the camera is level.
Other Shooting Modes
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
P Mode
zzChoose [Start-up Image] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
Playback Mode
]
zzPlace the camera on a flat surface, such
as a table.
2
Wi-Fi Functions
Calibrate the electronic level.
Setting Menu
zzChoose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzTo adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [ ] button.
A confirmation message is displayed.
zzChoose [OK], and then press the [
button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
]
170
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Configure the setting.
zzChoose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose [On].
] is now shown on the shooting
zz[
screen (= 197).
zzThe screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
●● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
Before Use
Basic Guide
●● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
●● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (= 171) to [On].
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Screen Brightness
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
Other Shooting Modes
zzChoose [Disp. Brightness] on the [ 2]
tab, press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the brightness.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shoot.
zzTo activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
Power-Saving Adjustment
Playback Mode
●● For maximum brightness, press and hold [ ] for at least one
second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in singleimage display. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness] setting
on the [ 2] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and
hold the [ ] button again for at least one second or restart the
camera.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (= 27).
zzChoose [Power Saving] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
zzChoose an item, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to configure the setting.
171
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Still Images
zzTo set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
Movies
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is
useful in modes such as [ ] (= 65).
zzPress the [
2
zzChoose [Night Display] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose [On] (= 30).
] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Switch to the destination time zone.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [
] button.
zzTo restore the original display,
choose [Off].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zz[ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
(= 197).
●● You can also return the setting to [Off] by holding down the
[ ] button for at least one second on the shooting screen or in
Playback mode during single-image display.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (= 21) will
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Date and Time
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 20).
1
Specify your destination.
zzChoose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Adjust the date and time as follows.
zzChoose [Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
172
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [
] button in Shooting mode (= 26). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [
] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
zzChoose [Mute] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [On].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzChoose [Lens Retraction] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose [0 sec.].
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
zzChoose [Language ] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
●● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing
] button.
the [
●● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button
as you turn the camera on.
●● Sound is not played during movies (= 110) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [ ][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down quickly.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Adjusting the Volume
Playback Mode
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzChoose [Volume] on the [ 3] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzChoose an item, and then press the
[ ][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
173
Customizing Sounds
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
zzChoose [Sound Options] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzChoose an item, and then press the
[ ][ ] buttons to change the sound.
●● The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [
(= 36) cannot be changed.
List shooting modes on the selection screen by icon only, without mode
names, for faster selection.
zzChoose [Mode icon size/info] on the [ 3]
tab, and then choose [Small, no info].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] mode
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu
(= 29) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
zzChoose [Hints & Tips] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [Off].
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel
Other Shooting Modes
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased to respond to a
lighter touch, or you can disable touch control.
P Mode
zzChoose [ 4] tab ► [Touch Operation],
and then choose the desired option.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo increase touch-screen panel
sensitivity, choose [Sensitive], and to
disable touch control, choose [Disable].
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
174
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (= 34), the
MF indicator (= 87), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
zzChoose [Units] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ft/in].
Checking Certification Logos
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
zzChoose [Certification Logo Display] on
the [ 4] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
zzChoose [Copyright Info] on the [ 4] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]
button to access the keyboard, and enter
the name (= 32).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
] button. When [Accept
zzPress the [
changes?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Yes], and then press the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe information set here will now be
recorded in images.
Playback Mode
●● To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Deleting All Copyright Information
Setting Menu
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
zzFollow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(= 175) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
175
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted.
●● [Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab (= 141)
Restoring Default Camera Settings
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the [Reset All] screen.
zzChoose [Reset All] on the [ 4] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Restore default settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzDefault settings are now restored.
Playback Mode
●● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
-- Information registered using Face ID (= 45)
-- [ 1] tab setting [Video system] (= 170)
-- [ 2] tab settings [Time Zone] (= 172), [Date/Time] (= 172),
] (= 173)
and [ 3] tab setting [Language
-- Custom white balance data you have recorded (= 83)
-- Shooting Mode
-- Exposure compensation (= 78) setting
-- Movie mode (= 72)
-- Wi-Fi settings (= 141)
-- Calibrated value for the electronic level (= 170)
-- Copyright information (= 175)
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
176
System Map
Before Use
Included Accessories
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*1
Battery Pack
NB-13L*1
Wrist Strap
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
USB Cable (camera end: Micro-B)*2
Other Shooting Modes
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
Memory Card
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
Card Reader
Flash Units
separately
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2
Computer
P Mode
Power
Connect Station
CS100*4
Cases
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
Waterproof Case
WP-DC55
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or
accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine
Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack).
Please note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result
of such malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.
We appreciate your understanding in advance.
Accessories
HDMI cable
(camera end: Type D)*3
*1
*2
*3
*4
Appendix
Index
TV/Video
System
Also available for purchase separately.
A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
Use the latest firmware version.
177
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/
CA-DC30E
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that some
accessories may no longer be available. Also, the availability may vary
depending on the region.
Power Supplies
zzInsert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable
IFC‑600PCU (sold separately) is required
to connect the adapter to the camera.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Flash
Camera Basics
Battery Pack NB-13L
zzRechargeable lithium-ion battery
zzCharger for Battery Pack NB-13L
●● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that ▲ is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
▲ is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
Other Shooting Modes
zzExternal flash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in flash.
High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be
used.
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
●● The message [Battery communication error.] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or fire, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz).
●● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Other Accessories
Playback Mode
Waterproof Case WP-DC55
Wi-Fi Functions
zzFor underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
zzFor connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Appendix
Index
178
Printers
Using Optional Accessories
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
zzEven without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Photo and Movie Storage
Connect Station CS100
zzA media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2 ft.,
with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
quality of [
], [
], [
], [
], [
], [
],
or [
] can be viewed in high definition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
1
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Make sure the camera and TV are off.
P Mode
Connect the camera to the TV.
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
179
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
zzSwitch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
zzPress the [
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack
Before Use
Charge the battery pack by using the supplied battery pack with an
optional Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E and Interface
Cable IFC-600PCU.
Basic Guide
1
] button.
zzImages from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
Insert the battery pack.
Camera Basics
zzFollow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (= 19)
to open the cover.
zzWhen finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzInsert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Your Memory Card” (= 19).
●● Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
●● Some information may not be available when using a TV as the
display (= 198).
●● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
●● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, MF-Point Zoom (= 87), MF Peaking (= 88) and
Night Display (= 172) are not available.
Advanced Guide
Other Shooting Modes
zzFollow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (= 19)
to close the cover.
2
(2)
(1)
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Connect the compact power adapter
to the camera.
Playback Mode
zzWith the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzInsert the larger plug of the interface
cable into the compact power adapter.
Appendix
Index
180
3
Charge the battery pack.
zzCA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the compact power adapter into a power
outlet (2).
zzCA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
zzCharging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
zzThe lamp turns off when charging
finishes.
zzRemove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●● When charging another battery, ensure that the interface cable is
removed from the camera before replacing the battery to charge.
●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (= 219).
●● You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
turning the camera on and entering Playback mode (= 24).
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
●● If the USB charge lamp does not light up, remove the interface
cable and insert the cable again.
●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
Playback Mode
You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Inserting and
Charging the Battery Pack” (= 180). For details about USB connections
on the computer, refer to the computer user manual.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Charging is not possible when the camera is off.
●● With some computers, battery charging may require the memory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
(= 19) before connecting the cable to the computer’s USB
port.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
181
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
●● CameraWindow
-- Import images to your computer
-- Register Picture Styles saved on the computer to the camera
●● Image Transfer Utility
-- Set up Image Sync (= 162) and receive images
●● Map Utility
-- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
●● Digital Photo Professional
-- Browse, process and edit RAW images
●● Picture Style Editor
-- Edit Picture Styles and create and save Picture Style files
●● To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
●● Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
For detailed system requirements and compatibility information on
computers for using the software, including support for new operating
systems, visit the Canon website.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Installing the Software
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software”
(= 147).
Other Shooting Modes
Saving Images to a Computer
P Mode
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Connect the camera to the
computer.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzWith the camera turned off, open the
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzConnect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
Appendix
Index
182
2
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzMac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
zzWindows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
zzIn the screen that is displayed, click the
change program link of [
].
zzChoose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
zzDouble-click [
●● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
●● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
-- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
-- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
-- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
-- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
-- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version,
the software in use, or image file sizes.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
].
Wi-Fi Functions
3
Save the images to the computer.
Setting Menu
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
Accessories
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Appendix
zzAfter images are saved, close
] button to
CameraWindow, press the [
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
Index
zzTo view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
183
5
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots and configure a variety of settings used for your printer
or photo printing services by connecting the camera to a PictBridgecompatible printer with a cable.
A Canon SELPHY CP printer is used in this example of PictBridge
printing. Also refer to your printer user manual.
] button, choose [
] button again.
Before Use
], and
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Print the image.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
Easy Print
Still Images
Access the printing screen.
zzPress the [
press the [
Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPrinting now begins.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 4 after
printing is finished.
P Mode
zzWhen you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
zzOpen the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (= 179).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zzConnect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3
4
Turn the printer on.
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
184
Configuring Print Settings
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
1
Movies
Access the printing screen.
zzFollow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(= 184) to access this screen.
2
Configure the settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose an option (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button to return to the
printing screen.
Default
Date
File No.
Both
Off
Default
Off
Matches current printer settings.
Prints images with the date added.
Prints images with the file number added.
Prints images with both the date and file
number added.
–
Matches current printer settings.
–
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Choose the number of copies to print.
Copies
On
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print (= 185).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
(= 186).
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Settings” (= 185) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzA cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Other Shooting Modes
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
P Mode
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo move the frame, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Playback Mode
zzTo rotate the frame, turn the [
zzWhen finished, press the [
3
] dial.
Wi-Fi Functions
] button.
Setting Menu
Print the image.
zzFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (= 184)
to print.
●● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
185
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
1
Available Layout Options
Movies
Choose [Paper Settings].
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Settings” (= 185) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
Choose a layout.
]
zzWhen choosing [N-up], press the [ ]
button. On the next screen, choose the
number of images per sheet (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
P Mode
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose [ID Photo].
zzFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(= 186), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
5
Matches current printer settings.
Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of
L and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
1
Choose a type of paper.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
ID Photo
Fixed Size
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Default
Bordered
Borderless
N-up
Before Use
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Choose the long and short side
length.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose the length (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Print the image.
186
3
Choose the printing area.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Cropping], and then press
the [ ] button.
zzFollow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (= 185) to choose the printing
area.
4
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Access the printing screen.
zzFollow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(= 184) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Print the image.
Printing Movie Scenes
1
●● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button again.
●● After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
“Viewing” (= 110), you can also access the screen in step 1
here by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] in the movie
control panel and then pressing the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies
Batch printing (= 189) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Playback Mode
Choose a printing method.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. On the
next screen, choose an option (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
3
Sequence
Setting Menu
Accessories
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single
Wi-Fi Functions
Appendix
Index
Prints the current scene as a still image.
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a
single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number,
file number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting
[Caption] to [On].
187
Configuring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number,
and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the
print list.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [
4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print Settings], and then
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose and configure items as needed
(= 30).
Standard
Print Type
Index
Both
Date
File No.
Clear
DPOF data
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
One image is printed per sheet.
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Images are printed with the shooting date.
–
Images are printed with the file number.
–
All image print list settings are cleared
after printing.
–
●● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
●● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
●● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridgecompatible printers (sold separately).
●● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [ 2] tab (= 21).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [
4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
and then press the [ ] button (= 30).
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choose an image.
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzYou can now specify the number of
copies.
zzIf you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press the
[ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
188
3
Specify the number of prints.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
zzTo set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat
steps 2 – 3.
zzPrinting quantity cannot be specified for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
zzWhen finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
] button
Before Use
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 188), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
Movies
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 188), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 122) to specify images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Clearing All Images from the Print List
Other Shooting Modes
Movies
P Mode
zzWhen images have been added to the
print list (= 187 – = 189), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzAny DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Setting Menu
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Accessories
Movies
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 188), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
189
2
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and using CameraWindow to import them to your
computer (= 182), where they are copied to their own folder. This is
convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing
photobooks with your own printer.
Choose an image.
zz[
] is displayed.
zzTo remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
Choosing a Selection Method
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [
4] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
zzWhen finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
Choose [Select].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 190), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button
Other Shooting Modes
Adding All Images to a Photobook
P Mode
Still Images
1
Before Use
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 190), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Setting Menu
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Accessories
Movies
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 190), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
190
Troubleshooting
Before Use
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Power
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
Camera Basics
Nothing happens when the ON/OFF button is pressed.
●●
●●
●●
●●
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Confirm that the battery pack is charged (= 18).
Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (= 19).
Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (= 19).
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
●● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
●● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
●● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
The lens is not retracted.
●● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (= 19).
Setting Menu
The battery pack is swollen.
Accessories
●● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Appendix
Index
Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV (= 179).
191
Shooting
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
Before Use
Cannot shoot.
●● In Playback mode (= 110), press the shutter button halfway (= 27).
●● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Basic Guide
Strange display on the screen under low light (= 29).
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Advanced Guide
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
●● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
-- The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (= 97).
[ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (= 37).
[
●●
●●
●●
●●
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (= 37).
Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (= 52).
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 95).
Increase the ISO speed (= 80).
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (= 52).
Shots are out of focus.
●● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (= 27).
●● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (= 219).
●● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (= 53).
●● Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
●● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (= 90, = 94).
Shots are blurry.
●● Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
●●
●●
●●
●●
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 95).
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 78).
Adjust brightness by using the Auto Lighting Optimizer (= 81).
Use AE lock or spot metering (= 78, = 79).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●●
●●
●●
●●
Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 34).
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 78).
Use AE lock or spot metering (= 78, = 79).
Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (= 37).
●● Shoot within flash range (= 217).
●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
output level (= 96, = 103).
●● Increase the ISO speed (= 80).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●● Shoot within flash range (= 217).
●● Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 34).
●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
output level (= 96, = 103).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
White spots appear in flash shots.
●● This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
Accessories
Shots look grainy.
●● Lower the ISO speed (= 80).
●● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (= 55).
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
●● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (= 54). The red-eye reduction lamp (= 4)
will light up for flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
●● Edit images using red-eye correction (= 131).
Appendix
Index
192
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
●● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 169).
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
●● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions
Available in Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Set Menu”, and “Shooting Tab”
(= 200 – = 206).
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.
●● The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in
face information (= 45). If the icons still are not displayed even when you set
the birthday, re-register face information (= 45), or make sure that the date/
time is set correctly (= 172).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
●● Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
Shooting Movies
●● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(= 169, = 220).
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
●● The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
-- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 169).
-- Lower the image quality (= 50).
-- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (= 220).
Zooming is not possible.
●● Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (= 65).
●● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
(= 74) modes.
Subjects look distorted.
●● Linear noise may be recorded if lights or other sources of bright light are visible
on the shooting screen in an otherwise dark scene. Recompose the shot so that
the bright light source is not visible on the shooting screen or nearby.
Playback
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback is not possible.
●● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
files or alter the folder structure.
Camera Basics
Playback stops, or audio skips.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (= 169).
●● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
●● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Sound is not played during movies.
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
[
Linear noise is recorded.
] (= 62) and [
]
●● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not
a malfunction.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Adjust the volume (= 24) if you have activated [Mute] (= 173) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
●● No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (= 62), [ ] (= 68, = 74),
or [ ] (= 74) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the [
button.
Playback Mode
]
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
●● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
Setting Menu
Accessories
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
●● In simple information display mode (= 112), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (= 136).
Appendix
Index
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
●● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (= 26).
193
Cannot send images.
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
●● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [
] button
-- Press the [
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
●● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer
or computer via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
●● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new
devices/destinations (= 165).
●● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (= 153).
●● To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (= 142).
●● To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (= 147, = 149).
●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band.
●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
●● Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (= 217). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
●● The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
●● RAW images cannot be sent. For images captured in both JPEG and RAW
format, only the JPEG version is sent. However, RAW images can be sent using
Image Sync.
●● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (= 162). Before moving or renaming
these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Cannot resize images for sending.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
●● Movies cannot be resized.
P Mode
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (= 161).
●● Movies may take a long time to send.
●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
]
2.4 GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
is displayed.
●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
No notification message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
●● Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
●● Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are configured to
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notification
message.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
●● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (= 167).
194
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
●● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (= 19).
Memory card locked
●● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (= 19).
Cannot record!
●● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (= 19).
Memory card error (= 169)
●● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (= 2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(= 19), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufficient space on card
●● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (= 34, = 55,
= 77, = 100) or edit images (= 128). Either erase unneeded images
(= 123) or insert a memory card with enough free space (= 19).
Touch AF unavailable
●● Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (= 200).
Touch AF canceled
●● The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (= 93).
Charge the battery (= 18)
No Image.
●● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (= 121)
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
●● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
●● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image./No identification
information
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info (= 118)*, Magnify (= 119)*, Rotate (= 125)*, Favorites (= 126),
Edit (= 128)*, Print List (= 187)*, and Photobook Set-up (= 190)*.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Invalid selection range
●● When specifying a range for image selection (= 122, = 125, = 189), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
P Mode
Exceeded selection limit
●● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (= 187) or Photobook Set-up
(= 190). Choose 998 images or less.
●● Print List (= 187) or Photobook Set-up (= 190) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
●● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (= 121), Erase
(= 123), Favorites (= 126), Print List (= 187), or Photobook Set-up
(= 190).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Naming error!
Setting Menu
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [ 1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(= 168), or format the memory card (= 169).
Accessories
Appendix
Lens Error
●● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Index
195
A camera error was detected (error number)
●● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
File Error
●● Correct printing (= 184) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
●● Check the paper size setting (= 186). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
●● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
●● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (= 149).
●● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
●● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
●● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously.
Try reconnecting again.
No access points found
●● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
●● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
●● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
●● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
●● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending failed
Memory card error
Camera Basics
●● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
●● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufficient space.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
Playback Mode
●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Wi-Fi Functions
Receiving failed
Naming error!
Setting Menu
●● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Accessories
Insufficient space on server
●● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
●● Save the images sent via Image Sync (= 162) to your computer.
Check network settings
Appendix
Index
●● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
●● Check the access point security settings (= 149).
IP address conflict
●● Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
196
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(33)
(14)(15)(16) (17) (18)(19) (20) (21) (22)
(34)
(35)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
( )
(7) 6
( )
(9) 8
( )
(11) 10
(12)
(13)
(31)
Shooting mode (= 200),
Scene icon (= 38)
(2)
Flash mode (= 95)
(3)
Flash exposure compensation /
Flash output level
(= 96, = 103)
(4)
Metering method (= 79)
(5)
High ISO speed NR (= 80)
(6)
ND Filter (= 81)
(7)
Eco mode (= 171)
(8)
Drive Mode (= 44),
AEB shooting (= 81),
Focus bracketing (= 88)
(9)
Picture Style (= 84)
(23) Quick Set menu (= 29)
(34) Hybrid Auto mode (= 36)
(24) Focus range (= 87),
AF lock (= 94)
(35) Camera shake warning (= 37)
(25) AF frame (= 89),
Spot AE point frame (= 79)
(27) AE lock (= 78),
FE lock (= 96)
(25)
(28) Shutter speed (= 100, = 101)
(29) Aperture value (= 101)
(30) Electronic level (= 51)
(31) Exposure level (= 101)
(36) Wind filter (= 73)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(37) Time zone (= 172)
Camera Basics
(38) Image stabilization (= 52)
(39)
Auto Level (= 52)
(40)
Auto slow shutter (= 73)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(41) Attenuator (= 74)
Other Shooting Modes
(42) Expo. simulation (= 78)
(43) MF indicator (= 87)
P Mode
(44) Exposure compensation (= 78)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Battery Level
(32)
(44)
(1)
(33) Zoom bar (= 34)
(23)
(24)
(26) (40) (41) (42)
(43)
(29) (30)
(32) ISO speed (= 80)
(22) Histogram (= 113)
(26) Grid lines (= 106)
(36) (37) (38) (39)
(27) (28)
(21) Remaining time (= 220)
(10) White balance (= 82)
Display
(15) Battery level (= 197)
(16) Still image compression (= 97),
Recording pixel setting (= 97)
(17) Recordable shots (= 220)
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
(12) Touch Shutter (= 44)
(13) Self-timer (= 42)
Details
Sufficient charge
(11) Auto Lighting Optimizer (= 81)
(14) IS mode icon (= 40)
Playback Mode
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
(Blinking red)
[Charge the battery]
Nearly depleted. Charge the battery
pack soon.
Depleted. Charge the battery pack
immediately.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
(18) Maximum continuous shots
(19) Movie quality (= 50)
(20) Zoom magnification (= 41),
Digital tele-converter (= 89)
197
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(5) (6) (7)
(8)(9)(10)(11) (12) (13)
(14)
(15)
(20)
(16)
(18) (19)
(21)
(24) (26)
(25)
(17)
(28) (29)
(22) (23)
(30)
(28) Image quality / Frame rate
(movies) (= 50), Group
playback (= 117)
(30) Still images: Recording pixel
setting (= 220)
Movies: Playback time (= 220)
(29) Compression (image quality)
(= 97) / Recording pixels
(= 50), Digest movies
(= 36), RAW (= 98), MP4
(movies), Albums (= 136)
(31) File size
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (= 179).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
(31)
P Mode
(27)
(1)
Movies (= 34, = 110)
(16) Aperture value (= 101)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
(2)
Digest movies (= 114)
(3)
Group playback (= 117)
(17) Exposure compensation level
(= 78)
Playback Mode
(4)
Current image no. /
Total no. of images
(19) Highlight tone priority (= 82)
(5)
Histogram (= 113)
(20) White balance (= 82)
(6)
Battery level (= 197)
(7)
Wi-Fi signal strength (= 161)
(8)
Image Sync (= 162)
(21) White balance correction
(= 83), Picture Style setting
details (= 84)
(9)
Image editing (= 128),
Movie compression (= 135)
(10) Favorites (= 126)
(11) Protection (= 121)
(12) Folder number – File number
(= 168)
(13) Shooting date/time (= 20)
(14) Shooting mode (= 200)
(15) Shutter speed (= 100, = 101)
(18) ISO speed (= 80)
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
(22) Flash (= 95), Flash exposure
compensation (= 96)
Appendix
(23) Metering method (= 79)
(24) Auto Lighting Optimizer (= 81)
Index
(25) ND filter (= 81), Short clip
playback effect (= 74)
(26) High ISO speed NR (= 80)
(27) Focus range (= 87),
Red-eye correction (= 131)
198
Summary of Movie Control Panel
Before Use
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (= 110).
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Basic Guide
] to
Advanced Guide
Play
Camera Basics
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (= 135) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [
Other Shooting Modes
]
P Mode
] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (= 135) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected, = 135)
Playback Mode
Edit (= 134)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (= 184).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
●● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
199
Functions and Menu Tables
Before Use
Basic Guide
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Advanced Guide
Shooting Mode
Function
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
AUTO
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
ISO 125 – 12800
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O O O
–
O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O O O
–
O
*1 –
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O
O
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
O O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O
O
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– *2 –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Exposure Compensation (= 78)
ISO Speed
(= 80)
Drive Mode
(= 44)
Flash firing
(= 95)
Flash Exposure
Compensation
(= 96)
Flash Output
Level (= 103)
Camera Basics
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
Other Shooting Modes
–
*1 –
O
–
O
*2
*2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
±0
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O
O
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
– ±2
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Minimum/Medium/Maximum
*1 O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O Available or set automatically.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
– Not available.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
200
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
*1 O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Shutter Speed
*1 O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
BULB
*1 O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 *3
*3
*3
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Camera Basics
AE Lock/FE Lock in Standby* (= 78,
= 96)
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O
–
O
AE Lock (during recording), Exposure
Compensation (= 72, = 78)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O
–
–
O
AF Lock (when assigned to the Ring function
selector) (= 106)
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O
–
O O O O O
AF Lock (when assigned to the movie button)
(= 106)
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O
O
O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
AF Lock by touch during recording (= 94)
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O
–
–
–
–
O O
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
–
Optical Zoom
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O
O
O O O
–
–
O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
O
–
O O O
–
O O O O O
Program Shift (= 78)
4
Focus Range
(= 87)
/
O
–
–
Basic Guide
Aperture Value
Av/Tv Settings
(= 100,
= 101)
Advanced Guide
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
–
–
–
O O
–
–
–
O O
–
O Available or set automatically.
–
–
–
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
–
Setting Menu
– Not available.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
201
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
Manual Focus Switching When Recording
Movies (= 72)
Basic Guide
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O
Center
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
Periphery
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
Touch AF (= 93)
*1 O
O
O
O
O
Face Select (= 93)
*1 O
O
O
O
Touch Shutter (= 44)
*1 O
O
O
O
Change Shooting Information Display (= 29)
*1 O
O
O
O
Move the AF
Frame (= 90)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
–
O O O O O
–
O
–
O O O
–
O O O
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
–
O
–
O O O
–
O O O O O
O O O *5 *5 *5 O O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
O O
–
O O O O
–
O
O O O O *5 *5 *5 O O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
O O
–
O O O O
–
O
O
O O O
–
–
–
–
O O
–
O O
–
O
O O O
–
–
O O O
–
O
O
O
O O O
–
–
–
–
O O *6 O O
–
O
O O O O *6 –
–
–
–
–
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O
O O
Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.
To maintain the optimum exposure, ISO speed in addition to the aperture value or shutter speed
may be automatically changed.
FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode.
] is selected.
Only when [
Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
–
–
O
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
202
Quick Set Menu
Basic Guide
Shooting Mode
Function
AF method
(= 89)
Before Use
+Tracking
AF
AF operation
(= 91)
Image quality (= 97)
When Set
to NTSC
Movie rec. size
(= 50)
When Set
to PAL
O
O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
–
*2
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O
–
O
–
–
O O
O O
–
–
–
O O O
–
Advanced Guide
–
*1 O
O
Camera Basics
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
Other Shooting Modes
See “Shooting Tab” (= 206).
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
O
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O *3
O
O O O O O O O O
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O *3
O
O O O O O O
–
O
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
O
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O *3
O
O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O *3
O
O O O O O O
O Available or set automatically.
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
– Not available.
Appendix
Index
203
Function
*1 O
O
O
O
–
O
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
*1 O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O O O O O
–
*1 O
O
O
O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
Delay*5
*1 O
O
O
O
O
Shots*6
*1 O
O
O
O
*1 O
O
O
O
*1 O
O
O
O
*1 O
O
O
O
*1 O
O
O
*1 O
O
*1 O
Still Image
Aspect Ratio
(= 49)
Self-Timer
(= 42)
Self-Timer
Settings
/
/
/
Custom
Timer
ND Filter
(= 81)
White balance
(= 82)
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
O
–
–
O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O O O *4 – *4 –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O
–
–
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O
–
O
O
–
–
O O O O O
–
–
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O *4 O *4 O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O
–
O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O O
–
–
O O O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
–
–
WB Correction (Underwater) (= 57)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Set color temp. (= 84)
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O
O Available or set automatically.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
–
Color Adjustment (Biaxial) (= 70)
–
Camera Basics
–
*1 O
–
Advanced Guide
O O O O O O O O
WB Correction (= 83)
–
Basic Guide
–
O
O
–
O O O O O O
–
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
– Not available.
Appendix
Index
204
Function
Picture Style
(= 84)
Metering mode
(= 79)
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
(= 81)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Before Use
Shooting Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O
O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
[SERVO] when subject movement is detected.
Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (= 49).
Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.
Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O
O O O O
–
–
O O O
–
O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O
–
O
–
–
–
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
–
O Available or set automatically.
–
–
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
– Not available.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
205
Shooting Tab
Before Use
–
Rec. Mode (= 55, = 58, = 72)
Image
quality
(= 50,
= 97)
JPEG
/
RAW
/
/
/
/
–
Still Image Aspect Ratio (= 49)
1
Shooting
information
display
(= 106)
Basic Guide
Shooting Mode
Function
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
O
O O O
O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Grid 1 (9 diviGrid display sions)/Grid 2
(24 divisions)
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Disable
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
Enable
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
On
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Off/Hold
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
2 sec./4 sec./
8 sec.
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Image review (= 54)
Other Shooting Modes
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
O
Reverse Display
(= 28)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
O O O O O O O
*1 O
Expo. simulation
(= 78)
Camera Basics
O O O O O O O
Shooting Info/
Histogram/
Grid display/
Electronic
Level
Screen
info/ toggle
settings
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O Available or set automatically.
–
–
–
–
Accessories
Appendix
Index
– Not available.
206
Function
Touch Shutter
(= 44)
Face ID Settings
(= 45)
2
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Enable
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O O O O O
Disable
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
On/Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
button (= 106)
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
O O O O O O
O
O O O O O
Set
button (= 106)
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Set
function (= 104)
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
–
–
–
Quick setting menu layout (= 107)
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Save Settings (= 108)
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Standard
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O
–
O O O
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
1.6x/2.0x
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
Digital Zoom (= 41)
AF operation (= 91)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
–
Set
–
Basic Guide
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
–
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
–
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
3*5 AF method (= 89)
Wi-Fi Functions
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
AF Frame Size*2
(= 90)
Normal
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O
–
O O O O O
Small
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O O O
–
O O O O O
Continuous AF
(= 92)
On
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O
O
O O O O
–
O O O O O
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O
–
O Available or set automatically.
–
–
–
Setting Menu
Accessories
–
Appendix
– Not available.
Index
207
Function
AF+MF (= 92)
On/Off
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
AF-assist Beam
(= 53)
On
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
MF-Point Zoom
(= 87)
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
5x/10x
*1 O
O
O
O
Safety MF (= 87)
4*
6
Before Use
Shooting Mode
MF
Peaking
Settings
(= 88)
Peaking
O O O O O O O O O
O
–
–
O O O O O O
O
O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O
–
–
O
–
–
–
O O O
–
–
O O O
–
O O O O O
O O
–
–
O O O O O
–
–
O O O O O
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
On
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O O O O O O
O O O
–
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Low/High
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
O
–
O O O
–
O O O O O
Color
Red/Yellow/
Blue
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
O
–
O O O
–
O O O O O
IS
Settings
(= 52)
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
–
O O O O
–
O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O
Shoot Only
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O
O
O O O O O
Low
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O
–
–
–
–
O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
O
–
O
High
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
Enable
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O
–
–
–
–
O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
O
–
O
Disable
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Dynamic IS Standard
Auto level (= 52)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
O O O O O
Level
IS Mode
Basic Guide
–
On
–
–
–
–
Off
O O
–
–
O O O
–
O Available or set automatically.
–
–
–
O
–
–
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
– Not available.
208
Function
Bracketing (= 88)
ISO speed (= 80)
5*7
Before Use
Shooting Mode
BKT-Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
AEB
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Focus-BKT
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
ISO Speed
Highlight tone priority
(= 82)
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
See “Shooting Tab” (= 206).
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
Standard
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Fast/Slow
*1 –
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Disable
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O
–
Enable
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
Max ISO Speed
ISO
Auto
Rate of
Settings
Change
Basic Guide
Auto Lighting Optimizer (= 81)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
Metering mode (= 79)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
ND Filter (= 81)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
O Available or set automatically.
Setting Menu
– Not available.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
209
Function
Flash Mode
5*7
Flash
Settings
(= 54,
= 96,
= 97,
= 103)
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Auto
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O
O
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
Manual
*1 O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Flash Exp. Comp
See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (= 200).
Flash Output
See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (= 200).
Shutter
Sync.
Red-Eye
Lamp
Safety FE
1st-curtain
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O
–
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
2nd-curtain
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O
O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O
O
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
*1 –
O
O
O
O
O
O O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O
O
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
On
–
Basic Guide
–
–
–
–
O Available or set automatically.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
– Not available.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
210
Function
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Basic Guide
White Balance (= 82)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
O O
Custom WB (= 83)
O
O
O
–
–
WB Correction (= 83)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
Picture Style (= 84)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
High ISO speed NR
6*8 (= 80)
Spot AE Point
(= 79)
Safety Shift (= 101)
Color Adjustment
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O O O O
–
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Standard
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Low/High
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Center/
AF Point
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
*1 –
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
O Available or set automatically.
Playback Mode
– Not available.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
211
Function
Basic Guide
Self-Timer (= 42)
Save
Stills
Effect*3
7*9
Star
TimeLapse
Movie
Setting
(= 68)
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Shot
Interval
Frame Rate
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
Enable/
Disable
/
/
/
/
15 sec./30 sec./
1 min.*4
NTSC:
/
PAL:
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Camera Basics
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting
Time
60 min./90 min./
120 min./
Unlimited
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto
exposure
Lock to 1st shot/
For each shot
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O Available or set automatically.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
– Not available.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
212
Function
Sharp/Soft
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Standard
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Prominent
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Shooting
scene
Scene 1/
Scene 2/
Scene 3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
Interval/
Shots
1 – 4 sec./
30 – 900 shots
(Scene 1)
5 – 10 sec./
30 – 720 shots
(Scene 2)
11 – 30 sec./
30 – 240 shots
(Scene 3)
–
Auto
exposure
Lock to 1st shot/
For each shot
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
Review
image
Enable/
Disable
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
Star Emphasis
(= 66)
Star
Portrait
Settings
(= 65)
Star Visibility
7*9
Timelapse
movie
settings
(= 74)
Before Use
Shooting Mode
–
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
–
Playback Mode
O Available or set automatically.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
– Not available.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
213
Function
Digest Type (= 36)
Include Stills/
No Stills
Movie rec. size (= 50)
Wind Filter (= 73)
8
Attenuator (= 74)
Auto slow shutter
(= 73)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Basic Guide
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Advanced Guide
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 203).
Auto
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
Off
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
–
Auto
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Off/On
*1 O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
Enable
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
Disable
*1 O
O
O
O
O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O
Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
Enabled when the AF frame is set to [1-point AF].
Stills] is set to [Disable].
Enabled when [Save
Enabled when [Effect] is set to [Off].
Items from the [ 4] tab are shown on the [ 3] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
and [ ].
Items from the [ 6] tab are shown on the [ 4] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
and [ ].
Items from the [ 7] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]. Items from the [ 6] tab are shown on the [ 5]
tab in [ ] mode.
],
Items from the [ 7] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ]. Items
[
from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], and [ ].
],
Items from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 7] tab in these modes: [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
[
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
Camera Basics
O O O O O
O Available or set automatically.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
– Not available.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
- When using Face ID (= 45) in some modes or with some settings, names of
people may be recorded in shots even when not displayed.
214
Set Up Tab
Tab
1
2
Tab
Item
Reference
Page
Language
= 173
Mute
= 173
Volume
= 173
Sound Options
= 174
Hints & Tips
= 174
= 170
Mode icon size/info
= 174
= 51
Touch Operation
= 174
= 170
Units
= 175
Wireless settings
= 141
Certification Logo Display
= 175
Item
Reference
Page
Create Folder
= 168
File Numbering
= 168
Format
= 169
Video system
Electronic Level
Start-up Image
3
Eco Mode
= 171
Power Saving
= 27
Disp. Brightness
= 171
Copyright Info
= 175
Night Display
= 172
Reset All
= 176
Time Zone
= 172
Date/Time
= 172
Lens Retraction
= 173
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
My Menu Tab
Tab
1
Wi-Fi Functions
Item
Reference
Page
Setting Menu
My Menu settings
= 109
Accessories
Appendix
Index
215
Playback Tab
Tab
1
2
3
4
Tab
Item
Reference
Page
Transition Effect
= 110
Index Effect
= 115
Scroll Display
= 110
Item
Reference
Page
Protect
= 121
Rotate
= 125
Group Images
= 117
Erase
= 123
Auto Rotate
= 126
Favorites
= 126
Resume
= 110
Slideshow
= 120
Image jump with
= 117
Album Playback
= 136
Set Touch Actions
= 127
List/Play Digest Movies
= 114
Playback information display
= 112
Short Clip Mix
= 139
Image Search
= 115
Creative filters
= 130
Resize
= 128
Cropping
= 129
Red-Eye Correction
= 131
Face ID Info
= 114
RAW img processing
= 132
Print settings
= 188
Photobook Set-up
= 190
5
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
216
Handling Precautions
●● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
●● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields. The electromagnetic wave may
cause malfunction or erase image data.
●● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
●● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
●● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
●● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
changes in temperature (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
●● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
●● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container.
To maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Specifications
Before Use
Basic Guide
Camera
Advanced Guide
Image Sensor
Camera Effective Pixels
Camera Basics
(Image processing may cause a decrease
in the number of pixels.).........................Approx. 20.1 megapixels
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Total Pixels........................................Approx. 20.9 megapixels
Image Size.........................................1.0 type
Other Shooting Modes
Lens
Focal Length
(35mm film equivalent)......................8.8 – 36.8 mm (24 – 100 mm)
Zoom Magnification...........................4.2x
Step Zoom.........................................24, 28, 35, 50, 85, 100 mm
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Digital zoom
Magnification.....................................Approx. 4x
Max. Magnification
(digital x optical zoom).......................Approx. 17x
Focal Length
(max. telephoto, 35mm film equivalent).....Equivalent to approx. 400 mm
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Screen (Monitor)
Type...................................................TFT color liquid crystal
Screen Size.......................................7.5 cm (3.0 in.)
Effective Pixels..................................Approx. 1,040,000 dots
Setting Menu
Continuous Shooting (CIPA compliant)
Speed
Appendix
(Varies depending on the subject,
zoom position, and other shooting factors,
as well as memory card brands.) .............ONE SHOT H: Approx. 8.0 shots/
Accessories
Index
sec. (max. 30 shots)
ONE SHOT L: Approx. 4.0 shots/
sec.
SERVO H: Approx. 5.4 shots/sec.
(max. 46 shots)
SERVO L: Approx. 4.0 shots/sec.
217
Built-In Flash
Flash Range (Wide angle end)..........50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)
Flash Range (Telephoto end)............40 cm – 4.0 m (1.3 – 13 ft.)
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (automatic settings).........1 – 1/2000 sec.
Range in all shooting modes
Max................................................30 sec.
Min.................................................1/2000 sec.
Speed (unit: sec.)..............................Tv, M modes
(BULB) 30, 25, 20, 15, 13, 10,
8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5,
1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13, 1/15, 1/20,
1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80,
1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250,
1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800,
1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000
Speeds in ( ) for M mode only
Cannot be set 1/6 or slower in
Manual movie mode
Aperture
F number...........................................1.8 – 11 (W)
2.8 – 11 (T)
AF
AF method.........................................Face+Tracking AF (number of AF
frames: max. 31), Single-point AF
File Format.............................................Design rule for Camera File
system (DCF) compliant; DPOF
(version 1.1) compatible
Data Type (Still Images)
Image File Format.............................Exif 2.3 (DCF 2.0)
Image Types......................................JPEG, RAW (Canon original:
14‑bit, CR2)
Data Type (Movies)
Recording Format..............................MP4
Video..................................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio.................................................MPEG-4 AAC LC (stereo)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Power Source
Battery Pack......................................NB-13L
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Interface
Wired.................................................Hi-Speed USB (Micro),
HDMI (Type D)
Wireless.............................................Wi-Fi
Specifications: IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency: 2.4 GHz
Channels: 1 – 11
Security: WEP,
WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
NFC
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Operating Environment
Temperature......................................0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Setting Menu
Dimensions (CIPA compliant)
(W x H x D)............................................105.5 x 60.9 x 42.2 mm
(4.15 x 2.40 x 1.66 in.)
Weight (CIPA compliant)
Including Battery Pack,
Memory Card.....................................Approx. 319 g (approx. 11.3 oz.)
Camera Body Only............................Approx. 294 g (approx. 10.4 oz.)
Accessories
Appendix
Index
218
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots (CIPA compliant)
Number of Shots in Eco Mode
Movie Recording Time (CIPA compliant)*1
Movie Recording Time (Continuous
Shooting)*2
Playback Time*3
Approx. 265 shots
Approx. 355 shots
Approx. 55 min.
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
*
Approx. 1 hr. 30 min
Approx. 5 hr.
*1Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:
] mode, with all other settings set to defaults
- In [
- With recording, stopping, zooming, and turning the camera on and off
*2Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:
] mode, with all other settings set to defaults
- In [
- Without zooming or other operations
- Automatically stop/resume after the time or capacity per recording is reached
*3Time when playing back a slideshow of still images.
Other
modes
Focus
Range
–
Before Use
Maximum Wide Angle
( )
5 cm – ∞
(2.0 in. – infinity)
5 cm – ∞
(2.0 in. – infinity)
5 cm – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
5 cm – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
1.5 m – 20 m
(5.0 – 65.6 ft.)
Maximum Telephoto
( )
40 cm – ∞
(1.3 ft. – infinity)
40 cm – ∞
(1.3 ft. – infinity)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
Other Shooting Modes
1.5 m – 20 m
(5.0 – 65.6 ft.)
P Mode
* Same with manual focus enabled.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
219
Number of Shots per Memory Card
Recording Time per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (= 49) of 3:2 per memory card
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Size
Number of shots per 16 GB memory card (approx. shots)
Frame Rate/
Video System
1786
29 min.
59 sec.
1 hour 26 min.
5 sec.
29 min.
59 sec.
(1280 x 720)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
4 hours 5 min.
15 sec.
29 min.
59 sec.
(640 x 480)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
10 hours 22 min.
35 sec.
1 hour
(1920 x 1080)
6656
,
*(NTSC)
6073
11043
7712
RAW
525
●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Recording
Time for
Individual
Movies
(Approx.)
59 min. 30 sec.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
2999
3982
Recording
Time per 16 GB
Memory Card
(Approx.)
Before Use
(PAL)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
* Actual frame rate: 23.976 fps.
●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Recording times for individual movies are based on memory cards
rated at an SD speed class of 10. Recording may stop when cards
rated at lower speed classes are used. Recording will also stop
automatically when the file size reaches 4 GB, or when the card
becomes full.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
220
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type:
Nominal Voltage:
Nominal Capacity:
Charging Cycles:
Operating Temperatures:
Before Use
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
3.6 V DC
1250 mAh
Approx. 300 times
0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
Rated Output:
4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time:
Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
Rated Output:
5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Charging Time: Approx. 5 hr.* (Charged with NB-13L inserted
in the camera)
Operating Temperatures:
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
* Charging time varies considerably depending on
the remaining battery power.
Setting Menu
5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Accessories
●● Size, weight, and number of shots available are based on
measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products
Association (CIPA).
●● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
●● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
Appendix
Index
221
Index
A
Accessories 178
AEB shooting 81
AE lock 78
AF frames 89
AF lock 94
AF method 89
Aspect ratio 49
Auto lighting optimizer 81
Auto mode (shooting mode) 22, 34
Av (shooting mode) 101
B
Background defocus
(shooting mode) 63
Batteries → Date/time
(date/time battery)
Battery charger 2, 178
Battery pack
Charging 18
Eco mode 171
Level 197
Power saving 27
C
Camera
Reset all 176
Camera access point mode 147
Camera Connect 142
CameraWindow 182
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 153
Clock 33
Color (white balance) 82
Compression 97
Connecting via an access point 149
Continuous shooting 39, 44
Creative filters 130
Cropping 129, 185
C (shooting mode) 105
Custom white balance 83
D
Date/time
Changing 21
Date/time battery 21
Settings 20
World clock 172
Defaults → Reset all
Digital tele-converter 89
Digital zoom 41
Display language 22
DPOF 187
Dragging 17
E
Eco mode 171
Editing
Cropping 129
Red-eye correction 131
Resizing images 128
Editing or erasing connection
information 165
Electronic level 51
Erasing 123
Erasing all 124
Error messages 195
Exposure
AE lock 78
Compensation 78
FE lock 96
F
Face ID 45
Face select 93
Favorites 126
FE lock 96
File numbering 168
Fireworks (shooting mode) 56
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 60
Flash
Deactivating flash 95
Flash exposure compensation 96
On 95
Slow synchro 95
Focus bracketing 88
Focus check 119
Focusing
AF frames 89
AF lock 94
MF peaking 88
Servo AF 91
Touch AF 93
Focus lock 90
Focus range
Macro 87
Manual focus 87
Quick 57
Underwater macro 57
G
Geotagging images 164
GPS information display 113
Grainy B/W (shooting mode) 64
Grid lines 106
H
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode) 56
HDMI cable 179
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 60
High ISO speed noise reduction 80
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 36
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
I
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
iFrame movies (movie mode) 76
Image quality → Compression Images
Display period 54
Erasing 123
Playback → Viewing
Protecting 121
Image stabilization 52, 99
Image Sync 162
Indicator 33, 53, 54
ISO speed 80
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
J
Jump display 117
Setting Menu
M
M (shooting mode) 101
Macro (focus range) 87
Magnified display 119
Manual focus (focus range) 87
Manual (movie mode) 103
Memory cards 2
Recording time 220
Menu
Basic operations 30
Table 200
Metering method 79
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 62
Accessories
Appendix
Index
222
Movies
Editing 134
Image quality (recording pixels/
frame rate) 50
Recording time 220
N
ND filter 81
P
P (shooting mode) 77
Package contents 2
Panning (shooting mode) 59
Photobook set-up 190
PictBridge 179, 184
Playback → Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 56
Power 178
→ Battery charger,
→ Battery pack
Power saving 27
Printing 184
Program AE 77
Protecting 121
Q
Quick (focus range) 57
Quick Set menu
Table 203
R
RAW 98
RAW img processing 132
Recording pixels (image size) 97
Red-eye correction 131
Remote shooting 164
Reset all 176
Resizing images 128
Rotating 125
S
Saving images to a computer 182
Screen
Display language 22
Icons 197, 198
Menu → Quick Set menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→ Memory cards
Searching 115
Self portrait (shooting mode) 58
Self-timer 42
2-second self-timer 43
Customizing the self-timer 43
Sending images 158
Sending images
to another camera 158
Sending images to a smartphone 142
Sending images to Web services 153
Servo AF 91
Shooting
Shooting date/time → Date/time
Shooting information 106, 197
Short clips (movie mode) 74
Slideshow 120
Soft focus (shooting mode) 64
Software
Installation 147, 182
Saving images
to a computer 182
Sounds 173
Standard (movie mode) 72
Star (shooting mode) 65
Star nightscape
(shooting mode) 66
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting mode) 68
Star trails (shooting mode) 67
Story Highlights 136
Strap 2
T
Terminal 179, 184
Time-lapse movie (shooting mode) 74
Touch Actions 127
Touch AF 93
Touching 17
Touch-screen panel 17
Touch Shutter 44
Toy camera effect
(shooting mode) 63
Traveling with the camera 172
Troubleshooting 191
TV display 179
Tv (shooting mode) 100
W
White balance (color) 82
Wi-Fi functions 141
Wi-Fi menu 144
Wind filter 73
World clock 172
Wrist strap → Strap
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Z
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Zoom 22, 35, 41
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
U
Wi-Fi Functions
Underwater macro (focus range) 57
Underwater (shooting mode) 57
Setting Menu
V
Viewing 24
Image search 115
Index display 115
Jump display 117
Magnified display 119
Single-image display 24
Slideshow 120
TV display 179
Accessories
Appendix
Index
223
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
●● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
-- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
●● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
-- Altering or modifying the product
-- Removing the certification labels from the product
●● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
●● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
●● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
●● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
●● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
●● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
●● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Other Shooting Modes
Security Precautions
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
P Mode
Playback Mode
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
224
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
●● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
●● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
Trademarks and Licensing
Before Use
●● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Basic Guide
●● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Advanced Guide
●● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Camera Basics
●● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
●● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
P Mode
●● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
●● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
Playback Mode
●● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Disclaimer
●● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
Appendix
●● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
●● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specifications and appearance.
Index
●● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
●● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
225